2009 350Z Roadster Owner's Manual

Foreword

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN tures to all occupants of the vehicle. owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with WARNING confidence. It was produced using the latest ¼ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual techniques and strict quality control. for important safety information. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMA- This manual was prepared to help you under- TION stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of REMINDERS FOR SAFETY! MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE driving pleasure. Please read through this Follow these important driving rules to This vehicle should not be modified. Modi- manual before operating your vehicle. help ensure a safe and comfortable trip fication could affect its performance, A separate Warranty Information Booklet for you and your passengers! safety or durability, and may even violate explains details about the warranties cov- ¼ NEVER drive under the influence of governmental regulations. In addition, ering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service alcohol or drugs. damage or performance problems result- and Maintenance Guide explains details ing from modification may not be covered ¼ about maintaining and servicing your ve- ALWAYS observe posted speed limits under NISSAN warranties. hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer and never drive too fast for condi- Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will tions. WHEN READING THE MANUAL explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as ¼ ALWAYS give your full attention to This manual includes information for all clarify your rights under your state’s lemon driving and avoid using vehicle fea- options available on this model. There- law. tures or taking other actions that fore, you may find some information that Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. could distract you. does not apply to your vehicle. When you require any service or have any ¼ ALWAYS use your seat belts. Refer to All information, specifications and illustrations in questions, we will be glad to assist you with the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” this manual are those in effect at the time of extensive resources available to us. in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE supplemental restraint system” sec- specifications or design at any time without SAFELY tion for precautions regarding chil- notice. Before driving your vehicle please read dren. your Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ¼ ALWAYS provide information about ensure familiarity with controls and main- the proper use of vehicle safety fea- tenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways: WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

SIC0697 CAUTION If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen”. This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your If you see a symbol similar to these in an vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the illustration, it means the arrow points to the front procedures must be followed carefully. of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: “Perchlor- ate Material — special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate.” BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., © 2008 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. U.S.A. and licenced to Visteon TOKYO, JAPAN Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES ... Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for You can write to NISSAN with the information NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you the following information: on the left at: would like to provide NISSAN directly with — Your name, address, and telephone For U.S. customers comments or questions, please contact the number Nissan North America, Inc. NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using — Vehicle identification number (attached to the Consumer Affairs Department our toll-free number: top of the instrument panel on the driver’s P.O. Box 685003 side) Franklin, TN 37068-5003 For U.S. customers — Date of purchase 1-800-NISSAN-1 — Current odometer reading For Canadian customers (1-800-647-7261) — Your NISSAN dealer’s name Nissan Canada Inc. For Canadian customers — Your comments or questions 5290 Orbitor Drive 1-800-387-0122 OR Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Table of Illustrated table of contents Contents Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ...... 0-2 Coupe models ...... 0-6 Exterior front ...... 0-3 Roadster models ...... 0-8 Exterior rear ...... 0-4 Instrument panel ...... 0-10 Coupe models ...... 0-4 Meters and gauges ...... 0-11 Roadster models ...... 0-5 Engine compartment ...... 0-12 Passenger compartment ...... 0-6

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS 1. Supplemental front-impact air bags (Page 1-22) 2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bags* (P.1-22) 3. Seat belts (P.1-9) 4. Seats (P.1-2) — Child restraints (P.1-17) — Booster seats (P.1-18) 5. Head restraints (P.1-8) — Front-seat Active Head Restraints (P.1-9) 6. Child restraint anchor point (for top tether strap child restraint) (Coupe models) 7. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor) — Advanced air bag system (P.1-29) 8. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags* (P.1-22) 9. Seat belt pretensioner (P.1-35) *: if so equipped

SSI0255 0-2 Illustrated table of contents

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Hood (P.3-8) 2. Windshield wiper and washer — Switch (P.2-21) — Wiper replacement (P.8-19) — Washer fluid (P.8-14) 3. Power windows (P.2-39) — Automatic adjusting function (P.2-40, P.8-15) 4. Recovery hook installation (P.6-12) License plate installation (P.9-12) 5. Headlight, park and turn signal lights — Switch (P.2-24) — Bulb (P.8-27) 6. Tires — Wheels and tires (P.8-30, P.9-8) — Flat tire (P.6-2) — Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (P.2-13, P.5-3) 7. Outside mirrors (P.3-27) 8. Doors — Keys (P.3-2) — Door locks (P.3-3) — Keyfob (P.3-5)

SSI0289 Illustrated table of contents 0-3

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ EXTERIOR REAR

COUPE MODELS 1. Antenna (P.4-30) 2. Rear hatch release switch (P.3-9) 3. Rear window defroster (P.2-23) 4. High-mounted stop light (Bulb) (P.8-28) 5. Satellite radio antenna* (P.4-13) 6. Rear window wiper and washer — Switch (P.2-22) — Washer fluid (P.8-14) 7. License plate lights (Bulb) (P.8-28) 8. Rear hatch release (secondary) (P.3-12) 9. Luggage compartment light (P.2-42, P.8-28) 10. Back-up, Turn signal light (Bulb) (P.8-28) 11. Side marker, Stop/Tail light (Bulb) (P.8-28) 12. Fuel — Fuel-filler door (P.3-23) — Fuel recommendation (P.9-3) *: if so equipped

SSI0152 0-4 Illustrated table of contents

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ROADSTER MODELS 1. Antenna (P.4-30) 2. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-10) 3. Trunk light (P.2-42, P.8-28) 4. High-mounted stop light (Bulb) (P.8-28) 5. Rear window defroster (P.2-23) 6. Soft top (P.3-13) 7. Interior trunk lid release (P.3-11) 8. License plate lights (Bulb) (P.8-28) 9. Back-up, Turn signal light (Bulb) (P.8-28) 10. Side marker, Stop/Tail light (Bulb) (P.8-28) 11. Fuel — Fuel-filler door (P.3-23) — Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)

SSI0003 Illustrated table of contents 0-5

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

COUPE MODELS 1. Coat hook (P.2-38) 2. Seat belts (P.1-9) 3. Seats — Manual seats adjustment (P.1-3) — Power seats adjustment (P.1-3) 4. Passenger seat — Tilt lever for passenger seat (seatback) (P.1-6) 5. Power window switch (P.2-39)/Power door lock switch (P.3-4) 6. Outside mirror remote control switch (P.3-27) 7. Sun visor (P.3-25) 8. Interior light (P.2-41) 9. Sunglasses holder (P.2-32) 10. Inside mirror (P.3-26) — Automatic anti-glare inside mirror* (P.3-26) — HomeLink universal transceiver* (P.2-43) 11. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-30)/Microphone (Bluetooth Hands- Free Phone System*) (P.4-31) 12. Rear parcel box (P.2-37) 13. Rear parcel box or Navigation system*1 14. Rear floor box (P.2-35) 15. Power outlet (P.2-31) 16. Console box (P.2-35) 17. Parking brake SSI0256 — Operation (P.5-16) 0-6 Illustrated table of contents

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ — Parking/Parking on hills (P.5-20) — Checking (P.8-21) 18. Selector lever or shift lever — Automatic transmission (P.5-11) — Manual transmission (P.5-14) 19. Cargo net (P.2-33) *: if so equipped *1: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ROADSTER MODELS 1. Seat belts (P.1-9) 2. Seats — Power seats adjustment (P.1-4) 3. Passenger seat — Power seatback tilt switch (P.1-6) — Cancel switch (P.1-7) 4. Power window switch (P.2-39)/Power door lock switch (P.3-4) 5. Outside mirror remote control switch (P.3-27) 6. Soft top latch lever (P.3-16) 7. Safety switch for soft top latch lever (P.3-16) 8. Interior light (P.2-41) 9. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-30) 10. Inside mirror (P.3-26) — Automatic anti-glare inside mirror* (P.3-26) — HomeLink universal transceiver* (P.2-43) 11. Rear parcel box (P.2-37) 12. Rear parcel box or Navigation system*1 13. Rear floor box (P.2-35) — Trunk lid cancel switch (P.3-11) — Secondary trunk lid release (P.3-12) 14. Power outlet (P.2-31) 15. Console box (P.2-35) 16. Parking brake — Operation (P.5-16) — Parking/Parking on hills (P.5-20) — Checking (P.8-21)

SSI0257 0-8 Illustrated table of contents

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 17. Selector lever or shift lever — Automatic transmission (P.5-11) — Manual transmission (P.5-14) 18. Cargo net (P.2-33) *: if so equipped *1: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ INSTRUMENT PANEL

9. Center ventilator (P.4-8) 10. Passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-22) 11. Side ventilators (P.4-8) 12. Soft top operating switch (for Roadster models) (P.3-13) 13. VDC (Vehicle dynamic control) OFF switch* (P.2-29) or TCS (Traction control system) OFF switch* (P.2-29) 14. Fuel-filler door opener switch (P.3-23) 15. Hood lock release handle (P.3-8) 16. Fuse box (P.8-23) 17. Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.3-25) 18. Ignition switch (P.5-7) 19. Navigation system display (P.4-2)*1 or In- strument pocket (P.2-32) 20. Audio system (P.4-12)/Clock (P.2-30) 21. Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch (P.2-23) 22. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-27) 23. Cup holder (P.2-33) 24. Heated seat switch* (P.2-28) 25. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-9) SIC3266 26. Power outlet (P.2-31) *: if so equipped 1. Headlight/turn signal switch (P.2-24) 4. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-22)/Horn 2. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-27) *1: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. (P.2-26) 5. Meters/gauges (P.2-3) 3. Steering wheel switch for audio control* 6. Cruise control main/set switch* (P.5-17) (P.4-29) or switch for Bluetooth Hands- 7. Trip computer mode/setting switch (P.2-8) Free Phone System* (P.4-31) 8. Wiper/washer switch (P.2-21)

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ METERS AND GAUGES

SIC1948A Triple meter 8. Automatic transmission position indicator (P.2-15, P.5-11) or Manual transmission up- shift indicator (P.2-10, P.5-15) 9. Reset knob for trip odometer (P.2-4) 10. Odometer (Total/Twin trip) (P.2-4) 11. Trip computer setting switch (P.2-8) SIC3329 12. Trip computer mode switch (P.2-8) Combination meter 1. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-11) 5. Instrument brightness control switch 13. Trip computer (P.2-8) 2. Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (P.2-26) (P.2-26) 14. Engine oil pressure gauge (P.2-7) 6. Fuel gauge (P.2-6) 3. Tachometer (P.2-5) 15. Volt meter (P.2-8) 7. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-5) 4. Speedometer (P.2-4)

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-21) 2. Battery (P.8-15) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-9) 4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-13) 5. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T models) (P.8-13) 6. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-14) 7. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-12) 8. Air cleaner (P.8-18) 9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-8) 10. Engine drive belts (P.8-17) 11. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-8) 12. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-9) Do not tamper with the strut tower bar adjustment kA . The strut tower bar has been adjusted to the most suitable position at the factory.

SDI2050 0-12 Illustrated table of contents

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats ...... 1-2 Pregnant women ...... 1-13 Front manual seat adjustment Injured persons ...... 1-13 (for Coupe models) ...... 1-3 Three-point type seat belt with retractor ...... 1-13 Front power seat adjustment Seat belt extenders ...... 1-16 (for Coupe models — if so equipped) ...... 1-3 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-16 Front power seat adjustment Child restraints ...... 1-17 (for Roadster models) ...... 1-4 Precautions on child restraints ...... 1-17 Seat lifter (for driver’s seat) ...... 1-6 Booster seats ...... 1-19 Tilting and reclining passenger’s seat from driver’s Precautions on booster seats ...... 1-19 seat ...... 1-6 Booster seat installation on front passenger Head restraint adjustment ...... 1-8 seat...... 1-21 Front-seat active head restraints ...... 1-9 Supplemental restraint system ...... 1-22 Seat belts ...... 1-9 Precautions on supplemental restraint system ..... 1-22 Precautions on seat belt usage ...... 1-9 Supplemental air bag warning labels ...... 1-36 Child safety ...... 1-12 Supplemental air bag warning light ...... 1-37

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SEATS

side the vehicle. They could unknow- ingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. ¼ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle. ¼ The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. SSS0133 Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and WARNING ¼ For the most effective protection straight up in the seat. If the seatback when the vehicle is in motion, the is reclined, the risk of sliding under seat should be upright. Always sit the lap belt and being injured is in- ¼ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when creased. the seatback is reclined. This can be well back in the seat with both feet dangerous. The shoulder belt will not on the floor and adjust the seat properly. See “Precautions on seat belt be against your body. In an accident, CAUTION you could be thrown into it and re- usage” later in this section. ceive neck or other serious injuries. ¼ After adjustment, gently rock in the When adjusting the seat positions, be You could also slide under the lap seat to make sure it is securely sure not to contact any moving parts to belt and receive serious internal locked. injuries. avoid possible injuries and/or damages. ¼ Do not leave children unattended in-

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT (for Coupe models — if so equipped) Operating tips ¼ The seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. ¼ Do not operate the power support seat for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

SSS0394 FRONT MANUAL SEAT k2 Reclining ADJUSTMENT (for Coupe models) To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and k1 Forward and backward lean back. To bring the seatback forward again, pull the lever and move your body forward. The Pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward seatback will move forward. or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for When sliding the passenger’s seat backward, added comfort and to help obtain proper seat be careful not to crush items in the seatback belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” pocket against the rear floor box. later in this section. The seatback may also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position with the parking brake fully applied.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT (for Roadster models) Operating tips ¼ The seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. ¼ Do not operate the power support seat for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

SPA1793 k1 Forward and backward k2 Reclining (for passenger’s seat) Moving the sliding switch forward or backward The passenger’s seat is equipped with a manual will slide the seat forward or backward to the lever for reclining. See “Front manual seat ad- desired position. justment” earlier in this section. When sliding the passenger’s seat backward, The reclining feature allows adjustment of the be careful not to crush items in the seatback seatback for occupants of different sizes for pocket against the rear floor box. added comfort and to help obtain proper seat k belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” 2 Reclining (for driver’s seat) later in this section. The seatback may also be Move the reclining switch backward until the reclined to allow occupants to rest when the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the forward, move the switch forward and move your P (Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking body forward. The seatback will move forward. brake fully applied.

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ function or when a child restraint is installed in the passenger’s seat, push the seatback tilt cancel switch to the CANCEL position. For more information about operation conditions, see “Soft top” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section. For the cancel switch, see “Tilting and reclining passenger’s seat from driver’s seat” later in this section.

SSS0472 k1 Forward and backward The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for Moving the sliding switch forward or backward added comfort and to help obtain proper seat will slide the seat forward or backward to the belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” desired position. later in this section. The seatback may also be When sliding the passenger’s seat backward, reclined to allow occupants to rest when the be careful not to crush items in the seatback vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the pocket against the rear floor box. P (Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking brake fully applied. k 2 Reclining Automatic passenger seatback tilt Move the reclining switch backward until the function desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward, move the switch forward and move your The passenger seatback will automatically tilt forward and backward during the soft top body forward. The seatback will move forward. open/close operation. If you need to cancel this Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SPA1715 SSS0203 SSS0273 Coupe models Roadster models SEAT LIFTER (for driver’s seat) TILTING AND RECLINING Roadster models (power type) PASSENGER’S SEAT FROM Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of The power seatback tilt switch kB and the the seat cushion to the desired position. DRIVER’S SEAT seatback tilt cancel switch kC are located on the The passenger seatback can be adjusted from back side of the passenger seatback as shown. the driver’s seat to make it easier for the driver to Tilting/reclining operation: use the rear parcel box or rear floor box, or to help the passenger get in the vehicle. To tilt the passenger seatback forward, push the top ( side) of the power seatback tilt Coupe models (manual type) switch kB for more than 0.5 second. The seat- To tilt or recline the passenger seatback, pull up back will automatically tilt forward. To stop the the lever kA located on the back side of it, and movement, push the top or bottom of the switch. move the seatback forward or backward. To tilt or adjust the seatback backward, push and hold the bottom ( side) of the power seatback tilt switch. While the switch is held 1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ down, the seatback will move backward to the tion with the power seatback tilt switch. Use the original position that was last selected using the reclining switch (on the seat cushion) to select reclining switch (located on the seat cushion). the seatback position. Release the switch to stop the movement. Operation conditions: The power seatback tilt switch does not activate under the following conditions. ¼ when the passenger seat sliding/reclining switches on the seat cushion are being operated. ¼ when the seat tilt cancel switch is in the CANCEL position. (See “Seatback tilt cancel SSS0275 switch” later in this section.) Seatback tilt cancel switch: ¼ when the passenger seat belt is fastened. When the seatback tilt cancel switch kC is ¼ when the vehicle speed reaches 4 MPH (7 pushed to the CANCEL position, the km/h) and more. tilting/reclining operation using the power seat- The automatic tilting/reclining movement will be back tilt switch kB will be cancelled. Only the stopped: sliding/reclining switches (located on the seat cushion) are operational. Push the seatback tilt ¼ when any of the above 4 conditions occur. cancel switch to the AUTO position to reactivate ¼ when the power seatback tilt switch (top or the power seatback tilt switch. bottom) is pushed again. This cancel switch is linked with the automatic ¼ when the seatback is moved with the soft top passenger seatback tilt function of the soft top open/close operation. operation. See “Soft top” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section. When this interruption occurs, you cannot move the seatback backward from the stopped posi- Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ CAUTION

When a child restraint is installed in the passenger seat, be sure to turn the seatback tilt cancel switch to the CANCEL position. Otherwise, the child restraint may be damaged.

SSS0204 SSS0178A HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT Adjust the head restraints so the center is level with the center of your ears. To raise the head restraint, just pull it up. To lower, push the lock knob kA and push the head restraint down. WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat.

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SEAT BELTS

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT to supplement other safety systems. USAGE Always wear seat belts. No system can prevent all injuries in any acci- If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad- dent. justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your ¼ Do not attach anything to the head chances of being injured or killed in an accident restraint stalks. Doing so could im- and/or the severity of injury may be greatly pair Active Head Restraint function. reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz- supplemental air bag. ing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that seat belts be SSS0508 of the head restraint helps support the occupant’s head by reducing its backward movement worn at all times when a vehicle is being FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD and helping absorb some of the forces that may driven. RESTRAINTS lead to whiplash-type injuries. Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said WARNING that whiplash injury occurs most.

¼ Always adjust the head restraints Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head properly as specified in the previous restraints return to their original positions. section. Failure to do so can reduce the effectiveness of the Active Head Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as Restraint. described in the previous section. ¼ Active Head Restraints are designed

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ WARNING

¼ Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. ¼ The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can SSS0136 occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. ¼ Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. ¼ Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. SSS0134

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ¼ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se- may affect the operation of the seat curely fastened to the proper buckle. belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result ¼ Do not wear the seat belt inside out in serious personal injury. or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. ¼ Once a seat belt pretensioner has activated, it cannot be reused and ¼ Do not allow more than one person must be replaced together with the to use the same seat belt. retractor. See a NISSAN dealer. ¼ Never carry more people in the ve- ¼ Removal and installation of the pre- hicle than there are seat belts. This tensioner system components vehicle has only two seating posi- should be done by a NISSAN dealer. tions. Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area. ¼ All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, ¼ If the seat belt warning light glows should be inspected after any colli- continuously while the ignition is sion by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN turned ON with all doors closed and recommends that all seat belt as- all seat belts fastened, it may indi- semblies in use during a collision be cate a malfunction in the system. replaced unless the collision was mi- Have the system checked by a nor and the belts show no damage NISSAN dealer. and continue to operate properly. ¼ No changes should be made to the Seat belt assemblies not in use dur- seat belt system. For example, do not ing a collision should also be in- modify the seat belt, add material, or spected and replaced if either dam- install devices that may change the age or improper operation is noted. seat belt routing or tension. Doing so

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ WARNING

¼ Never let an infant or a small child who requires the use of a rear or front-facing child restraint ride in this vehicle. Do not attempt to hold a child in your lap or arms. ¼ This vehicle does not have an anchor for a top tether strap required for most child restraints. Never let children who require the use of rear or SSS0927 front-facing child restraints ride in this vehicle. CHILD SAFETY ride in this vehicle, they may be killed ¼ Larger children need special protec- or seriously injured in a crash. tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not WARNING fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or There are three basic types of child restraint ¼ Do not let infants and small children neck. The lap belt may not fit over systems: ride in this vehicle. their small hip bones. In an accident, ¼ ¼ This vehicle is not designed to ac- Rear-facing child restraint (should not be an improperly fitting seat belt could commodate Rear-facing child re- installed in this vehicle) cause serious or fatal injury. Always straints or Front-facing child re- ¼ Front-facing child restraint (should not be use appropriate child restraints. straints. installed in this vehicle) ¼ Never let a child stand or kneel on ¼ If you let infants or small children ¼ Booster seat (only children large enough for any seat and do not allow a child in booster seats can ride in this vehicle) the cargo areas while the vehicle is

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ shoulder belt without the booster seat. moving. The child could be seriously be against your body. In an accident, injured or killed in an accident or PREGNANT WOMEN you could be thrown into it and re- sudden stop. NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use ceive neck or other serious injuries. seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, You could also slide under the lap and always position the lap belt as low as belt and receive serious internal inju- Larger children possible around the hips, not the waist. Place ries. the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across Children large enough to use booster seats ¼ For the most effective protection instead of front or rear-facing child restraint your chest. Never put the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for when the vehicle is in motion, the systems can ride in this vehicle. The seat belt specific recommendations. seat should be upright. Always sit may not fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 well back in the seat with both feet in (142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs INJURED PERSONS on the floor and adjust the seat belt (18 kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit. NISSAN recommends that injured persons use properly. seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a your doctor for specific recommendations. commercially available booster seat if the shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits close THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat WITH RETRACTOR belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is WARNING properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating ¼ Every person who drives or rides in positions that have a three-point type seat belt. this vehicle should use a seat belt at The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and all times. have a label certifying that it complies with ¼ Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Ca- Do not ride in a moving vehicle when nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the seatback is reclined. This can be the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no dangerous. The shoulder belt will not longer on or near the face and neck, use the Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passenger some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts. The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode SSS0292A SSS0290A after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional Fastening the seat belts belt and release it. Then smoothly pull information, see “Booster seats” later in this the belt out of the retractor. section. 1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this section. 3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug The ALR mode should be used only for on the hips as shown. child restraint installation. During normal 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR and insert the tongue into the buckle until it 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the mode should not be activated. If it is acti- clicks. retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the vated, it may cause uncomfortable seat shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder ¼ belt tension. The retractor is designed to lock during and across your chest. a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion will permit the belt to The front passenger seat belt has two modes of WARNING move, and allow you some freedom of operation: movement in the seat. ¼ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) When fastening the seat belts, be cer- ¼ tain that the seatbacks are completely If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its ¼ fully retracted position, firmly pull the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) 1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ward. The retractor should lock and restrict secured in the latched position. If they further belt movement. are not completely secured, passengers If the retractor does not lock during this check or may be injured in an accident or sudden if you have any questions about belt operation, stop. see a NISSAN dealer.

SSS0326 Unfastening the seat belts To unfasten the belt, push the button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract. Checking seat belt operation Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock belt movement using two separate methods: ¼ when the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. ¼ when the vehicle slows down rapidly. You can check their operation as follows: ¼ grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly for- Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ dealer for assistance if the extender is required. the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. WARNING ¼ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may ¼ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. made by the same company which made the original equipment seat ¼ Periodically check to see that the seat belts, should be used with NISSAN belt and the metal components such as seat belts. buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work properly. If loose parts, ¼ Persons who can use the standard deterioration, cuts or other damage on the seat belt should not use an extender. webbing is found, the entire belt assembly Such unnecessary use could result in should be replaced. SSS0588 serious personal injury in the event of an accident. Shoulder belt arm ¼ Never use seat belt extenders to in- The shoulder belt arm should be adjusted to the stall child restraints. If the child re- position best for you. (See “Precautions on seat straint is not secured properly, the belt usage” earlier in this section.) child could be seriously injured in a To adjust, pull the shoulder belt arm. Pulling the collision or a sudden stop. arm forward will allow an easy access to the belt. SEAT BELT EXTENDERS SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE If, because of body size or driving position, it is ¼ To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt mild soap solution or any solution recom- and fasten it, an extender is available. The ex- mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of Then brush the webbing, wipe it with a cloth length and may be used for either the driver or and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow passenger seating position. See a NISSAN 1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ CHILD RESTRAINTS

the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself.

SSS0099 SSS0100 PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD ¼ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air RESTRAINTS Bag System, never install a rear or front-facing child restraint in the WARNING front seat. An inflating supplemental air bag could seriously injure or kill ¼ Children should always be placed in your child. an appropriate child restraint while ¼ riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a Never let an infant or a small child child restraint can result in serious who requires the use of a rear or injury or death. front-facing child restraint ride in this vehicle. ¼ Children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even ¼ This vehicle does not have an anchor for a top tether strap required for Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor most child restraints. Never let chil- CAUTION Vehicle Safety Standard 213. dren who require the use of rear or ¼ Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be front-facing child restraints ride in ¼ When installing a booster seat, be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat this vehicle. sure to turn off the automatic pas- and seat belt system. ¼ Improper use or improper installation senger seatback tilt function with the ¼ If the child restraint is compatible with your of a child restraint can increase the seatback tilt cancel switch (located vehicle, place your child in the child restraint risk or severity of injury for both the on the back of the passenger seat- and check the various adjustments to be sure child and other occupants of the ve- back). Otherwise, the booster seat the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is de- hicle and can lead to serious injury or may be damaged. See “Tilting and signed for your child’s height and weight. death in an accident. reclining passenger’s seat from driver’s seat” earlier in this section for Always follow all recommended procedures. ¼ Follow all of the child restraint manu- detailed information. The passenger seat is not suitable for use with a facturer’s instructions for installation rear-facing child restraint for infants. Therefore, ¼ Remember that a child restraint left and use. When purchasing a child infants should not be transported in this vehicle. in a closed vehicle can become very restraint, be sure to select one which hot. Check the seating surface and All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or will fit your child and vehicle. It may buckles before placing your child in territories require that infants and small children be restrained in approved child not be possible to properly install the child restraint. some types of child restraints in your restraint at all times while the vehicle is vehicle. being operated. Canadian law requires the In general, child restraints are designed to be top tether strap on front-facing child re- ¼ If the child restraint is not anchored installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder straints be secured to the designated an- properly, the risk of a child being seat belt. chor point on the vehicle. injured in a collision or a sudden stop Several manufacturers offer child restraints for greatly increases. children of various sizes. When selecting any ¼ Adjustable seatbacks should be po- child restraint, keep the following points in mind: sitioned to fit the child restraint, but ¼ Choose only a restraint with a label certifying as upright as possible. that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle 1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ BOOSTER SEATS

the strongest adult to resist the Booster seats are designed to prop- forces of a severe accident. The child erly route the lap and shoulder por- could be crushed between the adult tions of the seat belt over the stron- and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not gest portions of a child’s body to put the same seat belt around both provide the maximum protection dur- your child and yourself. ing a collision. ¼ A booster seat must only be installed ¼ Follow all of the booster seat manu- in a seating position that has a facturer’s instructions for installation lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a and use. When purchasing a booster three-point type seat belt with a seat, be sure to select one which will booster seat can result in a serious fit your child and vehicle. It may not injury in sudden stop or collision. be possible to properly install some SSS0099 types of booster seats in your ve- ¼ Improper use or improper installation hicle. PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER of a booster seat can increase the SEATS risk or severity of injury for both the ¼ If the booster seat and seat belt are child and other occupants of the ve- not used properly, the risk of a child WARNING hicle and can lead to serious injury or being injured in a collision or a sud- death in an accident. den stop greatly increases. ¼ Children should always be placed in ¼ Do not use towels, books, pillows or ¼ Adjustable seatbacks should be po- an appropriate child restraint while other items in place of a booster sitioned to fit the booster seat, but as riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a seat. Items such as these may move upright as possible. child restraint or booster seat can during normal driving or a collision ¼ After placing the child in the booster result in serious injury or death. and result in serious injury or death. seat and fastening the seat belt, Booster seats are designed to be ¼ Children should never be carried on make sure the shoulder portion of your lap. It is not possible for even used with a lap/shoulder belt.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ the belt is away from the child’s face driver’s seat” earlier in this section and neck and the lap portion of the for detailed information. belt does not cross the abdomen. ¼ Remember that a booster seat left in ¼ Do not put the shoulder belt behind a closed vehicle can become very hot. the child or under the child’s arm. If Check the seating surface and buck- you must install a booster seat in the les before placing your child in the front seat, see “Booster seat instal- booster seat. lation on front passenger seat” later in this section. ¼ When your booster seat is not in use, keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around LRS0455 in case of a sudden stop or accident. Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind: CAUTION ¼ Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor ¼ When installing a booster seat, be Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian sure to turn off the automatic pas- Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. senger seatback tilt function with the seatback tilt cancel switch (located on the back of the passenger seatback). Otherwise, the booster seat may be damaged. See “Tilting and reclining passenger’s seat from

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto- matic Locking Retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the front passenger seat: If you must install a booster seat in the SSS0363 LRS0454 front passenger seat, move the passenger ¼ Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be ¼ If the booster seat is compatible with your seat to the rearmost position. sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat vehicle, place your child in the booster seat 1. Turn the seatback tilt cancel switch to the and seat belt system. and check the various adjustments to be sure CANCEL position. the booster seat is compatible with your ¼ Make sure the child’s head will be properly child. Always follow all recommended proce- 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only supported by the booster seat or vehicle dures. place it in a front-facing direction. Always seat. The seatback must be at or above the follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in- center of the child’s ears. For example, if a All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or structions. low back booster seat k1 is chosen, the territories require that infants and small vehicle seatback must be at or above the children be restrained in an approved child center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is restraint at all times while the vehicle is lower than the center of the child’s ears, a being operated. high back booster seat k2 should be used.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM structions for adjusting the seat belt routing. PRECAUTIONS ON 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be SYSTEM sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s shoul- This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec- der. Be sure to follow the booster seat manu- tion contains important information concerning facturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat the following systems: belt routing. ¼ Driver and passenger supplemental front- 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc- impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown System) in the “Three-point type seat belt with retrac- ¼ tor” earlier in this section. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (if so equipped) 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front LRS0454 ¼ passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to the Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag (if so equipped for Coupe 3. The booster seat should be positioned on the ON position. The front passenger air bag models) vehicle seat so that it is stable. If necessary, status light may or may not illuminate adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain depending on the size of the child and the ¼ Seat belt pretensioner the correct booster seat fit. See “Head re- type of booster seat used. See “Front pas- Supplemental front-impact air bag system: straint adjustment” earlier in this section. If senger air bag and status light” later in this NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help the head restraint is removed, store it in a section. cushion the impact force to the head and chest secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head of the driver and front passenger in certain restraint when the booster seat is removed. If frontal collisions. the seating position does not have an adjust- Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- able head restraint and it is interfering with mental air bag system (if so equipped): This the proper booster seat fit, try a different system can help cushion the impact force to the booster seat. chest area of the driver and front passenger in 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low certain side impact collisions. The side air bags and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to are designed to inflate on the side where the follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in- vehicle is impacted. 1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag system (if so equipped for Coupe models): This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in certain side impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. The supplemental restraint system is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and passenger seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel, door finishers and side roof rails. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this SSS0131 section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.) WARNING light is lit or if the front passenger The supplemental air bags operate only seat is unoccupied. See “Front pas- when the ignition switch is in the ON or ¼ The front air bags ordinarily will not senger air bag and status light” later START position. inflate in the event of a side impact, in this section. After turning the ignition key to the ON rear impact, rollover, or lower sever- ¼ The seat belts and the front air bags position, the supplemental air bag warning ity frontal collision. Always wear your are most effective when you are sit- light illuminates. The supplemental air bag seat belts to help reduce the risk or ting well back and upright in the seat warning light will turn off after about 7 severity of injury in various kinds of with both feet on the floor. The front seconds if the systems are operational. accidents. air bags inflate with great force. Even ¼ The front passenger air bag will not with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag inflate if the passenger air bag status System, if you are unrestrained, lean- ing forward, sitting sideways or out

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ of position in any way, you are at erly seated and wearing the seat belt greater risk of injury or death in a can increase the risk or severity of crash. You may also receive serious injury in an accident. See “Front pas- or fatal injuries from the front air bag senger air bag and status light” later if you are up against it when it in- in this section. flates. Always sit back against the ¼ Keep hands on the outside of the seatback and as far away as practical steering wheel. Placing them inside from the steering wheel or instru- the steering wheel rim could increase ment panel. Always use the seat the risk that they are injured when belts. the front air bag inflates. ¼ The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag Sys- tem monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. ¼ The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be prop-

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SSS0132 SSS0016

SSS0006

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SSS0007 SSS0009 SSS0100

WARNING

¼ Never let an infant or a small child who requires the use of a rear or front-facing child restraint ride in this vehicle. Do not attempt to hold a child in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. ¼ This vehicle does not have an anchor SSS0008 SSS0099

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ for a top tether strap required for most child restraints. Never let children who require the use of a rear or front-facing child restraint ride in this vehicle. ¼ Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. ¼ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear or front-facing child restraint in the SSS0101 SSS0159 front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your in various kinds of accidents. child. WARNING ¼ The seat belts, side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective Front seat-mounted side-impact when you are sitting well back and supplemental air bags and roof- upright in the seat. The side air bags mounted curtain side-impact supple- and curtain air bags inflate with great mental air bags (if so equipped): force. Do not allow anyone to place ¼ The side air bags and curtain air bags their hand, leg or face near the side ordinarily will not inflate in the event air bag on the side of the seatback of of a frontal impact, rear impact, roll- the front seat or near the side roof over or lower severity side collision. rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in Always wear your seat belts to help the front seat to extend their hand reduce the risk or severity of injury out of the window or lean against the

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SSS0162

door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. ¼ Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation. SSS0680 1. Crash zone sensor 4. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sen- 2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules sor) 3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple- 5. Occupant classification system control unit mental air bags (if so equipped for Coupe 6. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen- models) tal air bag modules (if so equipped)

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 7. Air bag Control Unit (ACU) sensor). Inflator operation is based on the sever- may cause irritation and choking. Those with a 8. Satellite sensors ity of a collision and seat belt usage for the history of a breathing condition should get fresh driver. For the front passenger, the occupant air promptly. 9. Seat belt pretensioners classification sensor is also monitored. Based on Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System information from the sensors, only one front air help to cushion the impact force on the head and bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad- chest of the front occupants. They can help save crash severity and whether the front occupants vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an passenger seats. This system is designed to are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions meet certification requirements under U.S. regu- passenger air bag may be automatically turned or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, OFF under some conditions, depending on the restraint to the lower body. information provided by the occupant classifica- all of the information, cautions and warn- Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts ings in this manual still apply and must be tion sensor. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, should be correctly worn and the driver and followed. the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not passenger seated upright as far as practical The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is be illuminated, but the air bag will be off.). See away from the steering wheel or instrument located in the center of the steering wheel. The “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is this section for further details. One front air bag to help protect the front occupants. Because of mounted in the instrument panel. The front air inflating does not indicate improper performance this, the force of the front air bag inflating can bags are designed to inflate in higher severity increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too of the system. frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the close to, or is against, the air bag module during forces in another type of collision are similar to If you have any questions about your air bag inflation. those of a higher severity frontal impact. They system, contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If The air bag will deflate quickly after a collision. may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Ve- you are considering modifications of your vehicle hicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an due to a disability, you may also contact The front air bags operate only when the indication of proper air bag system operation. NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the ignition switch is in the ON or START po- The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual front of this Owner’s Manual. sition. stage air bag inflators. It also monitors informa- When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise After turning the ignition key to the ON tion from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag may be heard, followed by release of smoke. position, the supplemental air bag warning Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate light illuminates. The supplemental air bag and the occupant classification sensor (pattern a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it warning light will turn off after about 7 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ seconds if the system is operational. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light: The front passenger air bag status light is located on the overhead console. The light operates as follows: ¼ Unoccupied passenger seat: The light SSS0681 is OFF and the front passenger air bag is Front passenger air bag status light OFF and will not inflate in a crash. Front passenger air bag and status ¼ Passenger seat occupied by a small adult, light child or child restraint as outlined in this section: The light illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and WARNING will not inflate in a crash. ¼ Occupied passenger seat and the passenger The front passenger air bag is designed meets the conditions outlined in this section: to automatically turn OFF under some The light is OFF to indicate that the conditions. Read this section carefully front passenger air bag is operational. to learn how it operates. Proper use of Front passenger air bag: the seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described 1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for pied. The light will not illuminate when the front front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate the most effective protection by the seat belt and passenger seat is unoccupied. in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags supplemental air bag. If an adult occupant is in the seat but the in your vehicle are not part of this system. The occupant classification sensor is designed passenger air bag status light is illuminated The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce to operate as described above to turn the front (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag passenger air bag OFF for specified child re- that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting to certain front passenger seat occupants, such straints as required by the regulations. Failing to on the seat properly. as children, by requiring the air bag to be properly secure child restrains and to use the If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, automatically turned OFF. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child the passenger air bag status light may or may not restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or The occupant classification sensor (pattern sen- be illuminated, depending on the size of the child move in an accident or sudden stop. This can sor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and is and the type of child restraint being used. If the also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a designed to detect an occupant and objects on air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating crash instead of being OFF. See “Booster seats” the seat. For example, if a child is in the front that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could earlier in this section for proper use and instal- passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being lation. designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in used properly. Make sure that the child restraint accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the is installed properly, the seat belt is used prop- restraint of the type specified in the regulations passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a erly and the occupant is positioned properly. If is on the seat, the occupant classification sensor crash. However, heavy objects placed on the the air bag status light is still not illuminated, try can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF. seat could result in air bag inflation, because of a different child restraint. the object being detected by the occupant Front passenger seat adult occupants who are If the passenger air bag status light will not classification sensor. Other conditions could properly seated and using the seat belt as illuminate even though you believe that the child also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is outlined in this manual should not cause the restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are standing on the seat, or if two children are on the passenger air bag to be automatically turned properly positioned, the system may be sensing seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is Always be sure that you and all vehicle occu- however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat OFF). A NISSAN dealer can check that the pants are seated and restrained properly. properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by system is OFF by using a special tool. However, sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise Using the passenger air bag status light, you can until you have confirmed with your dealer that being out of position), this could cause the monitor when the front passenger air bag is your air bag is working properly, do not transport sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to automatically turned OFF with the seat occu- a child in this vehicle. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change heavy objects on the seat that will ¼ Do not make unauthorized changes in the passenger seat status. However, if the leave permanent impressions in the to your vehicle’s electrical system, seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status seat. Such objects can damage the suspension system or front end light will remain off. seat or occupant classification sen- structure. This could affect proper sor (pattern sensor). This can affect operation of the front air bag system. If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air the operation of the air bag system bag system, the supplemental air bag warning ¼ Tampering with the front air bag sys- light , located in the meter and gauges and result in serious personal injury. tem may result in serious personal area, will blink. Have the system checked by a ¼ Do not use water or acidic cleaners injury. Tampering includes changes NISSAN dealer. (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This to the steering wheel and the instru- Other supplemental front-impact air can damage the seat or occupant ment panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad bag precautions classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag and above the instrument panel or by system and result in serious personal installing additional trim material WARNING injury. around the air bag system. ¼ Immediately after inflation, several ¼ Modifying or tampering with the front ¼ Do not place any objects on the front air bag system components will passenger seat may result in serious steering wheel pad or on the instru- be hot. Do not touch them; you may personal injury. For example, do not ment panel. Also, do not place any severely burn yourself. change the front seats by placing objects between any occupant and material on the seat cushion or by ¼ the steering wheel or instrument No unauthorized changes should be installing additional trim material, panel. Such objects may become made to any components or wiring of such as seat covers, on the seat that dangerous projectiles and cause in- the supplemental air bag system. are not specifically designed to as- jury if the front air bag inflates. This is to prevent accidental inflation sure proper air bag operation. Addi- of the supplemental air bag or dam- ¼ Do not place objects with sharp tionally, do not stow any objects un- age to the supplemental air bag edges on the seat. Also, do not place der the front passenger seat or the system.

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ seat cushion and seatback. Such ob- supplemental air bag system. jects may interfere with the proper ¼ The SRS wiring harness connectors operation of the occupant classifica- are yellow and orange for easy iden- tion sensor. tification. ¼ No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of When selling your vehicle, we request that you the seat belt system. This may affect inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections the front air bag system. Tampering in this Owner’s Manual. with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. ¼ Work on and around the front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN SSS0209A dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a Front seat-mounted side-impact NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental supplemental air bag and Restraint System (SRS) wiring roof-mounted curtain side-impact should not be modified or discon- supplemental air bag systems (if so nected. Unauthorized electrical test equipped) equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag This section includes the information about both k system. the side air bag system A and the curtain air bag system kB . Curtain air bags are not available ¼ A cracked windshield should be re- on Roadster models. placed immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air could affect the function of the bags are located in the side roof rails. These systems are designed to meet voluntary guide- Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of- do not provide restraint to the lower body. position occupants. However, all of the infor- not place any objects (an umbrella, The seat belts should be correctly worn and the mation, cautions and warnings in this bag, etc.) between the front door fin- driver and passenger seated upright as far as manual still apply and must be followed. isher and the front seat. Such objects practical away from the side air bag, and seated The side air bags and curtain air bags are as far away as practical from the door finishers may become dangerous projectiles designed to inflate in higher severity side colli- and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain and cause injury if a side air bag sions on the side that the vehicle is impacted, air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect inflates. although they may inflate if the forces in another the front occupants. Because of this, the force of ¼ type of collision are similar to those of a higher Right after inflation, several side air the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating bag and curtain air bag system com- severity side impact. They are designed to inflate can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is ponents will be hot. Do not touch on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They too close to, or is against these air bag modules may not inflate in certain side collisions. during inflation. The side air bags and curtain air them; you may severely burn your- Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an bags will deflate quickly after the collision is self. indication of proper side air bag and curtain air over. ¼ No unauthorized changes should be bag operation. The side air bags and curtain air bags made to any components or wiring of When the side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the side air bag and curtain air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed the ON or START position. systems. This is to prevent accidental by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful inflation of the side air bags and After turning the ignition key to the ON and does not indicate a fire. Care should be curtain air bags or damage to the taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation position, the supplemental air bag warning side air bag and curtain air bag sys- and choking. Those with a history of a breathing light illuminates. The air bag warning light condition should get fresh air promptly. will turn off after about 7 seconds if the tems. systems are operational. Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, ¼ Do not make unauthorized changes help to cushion the impact force on the chest of to your vehicle’s electrical system, the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to WARNING suspension system or side panel. cushion the impact force to the head of occu- This could affect proper operation of pants. They can help save lives and reduce ¼ Do not place any objects near the the side air bag and curtain air bag serious injuries. However, an inflating side air systems. bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or seatback of the front seats. Also, do other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags 1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Seat belts with pretensioners ¼ Tampering with the side air bag sys- NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec- tem may result in serious personal trical equipment should also be done injury. For example, do not change WARNING by a NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized the front seats by placing material electrical test equipment and probing near the seatback or by installing ¼ The pretensioners cannot be reused devices should not be used on the additional trim material, such as seat after activation. They must be re- pretensioner system. placed together with the retractor covers, around the side air bag. ¼ and buckle as a unit. If you need to dispose of a pre- ¼ Work around and on the side air bag tensioner or scrap the vehicle, con- and curtain air bag systems should ¼ If the vehicle becomes involved in a tact a NISSAN dealer. Correct pre- be done by a NISSAN dealer. Instal- frontal collision but a pretensioner is tensioner disposal procedures are lation of electrical equipment should not activated, be sure to have the set forth in the appropriate NISSAN also be done by a NISSAN dealer. pretensioner system checked and, if Service Manual. Incorrect disposal The SRS wiring harnesses* should necessary, replaced by a NISSAN procedures could cause personal not be modified or disconnected. Un- dealer. injury. authorized electrical test equipment ¼ No unauthorized changes should be and probing devices should not be made to any components or wiring of The pretensioner system activates in conjunction used on the side air bag system. the pretensioner system. with the front air bag system. Working with the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt * The SRS wiring harness connectors This is to prevent damage to or acci- are yellow and orange for easy iden- when the vehicle becomes involved in certain dental activation of the pretension- types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat tification. ers. Tampering with the pretensioner occupants. system may result in serious per- When selling your vehicle, we request that you The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt sonal injury. inform the buyer about the side air bag and retractor. These seat belts are used the same curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to ¼ Work around and on the preten- way as conventional seat belts. the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual. sioner system should be done by a When a pretensioner activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. The smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner system, the supplemental air bag warning light will not come on, will flash intermittently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or START position. In this case, the pretensioner may not function properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you SSS0206 inform the buyer about the pretensioner and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG this Owner’s Manual. WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front- impact air bag and front seat-mounted side- impact supplemental air bag (if so equipped) systems are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ bag modules, pretensioners and all related wiring. air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and/or pretensioner systems will not After turning the ignition key to the ON position, operate in an accident. To help avoid the supplemental air bag warning light illumi- injury to yourself or others, have your nates. The supplemental air bag warning light vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is soon as possible. operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag, and Repair and replacement procedure pretensioner systems need servicing: The front air bags, side air bags (if so equipped), ¼ The supplemental air bag warning light re- curtain air bags (if so equipped for Coupe mains on after approximately 7 seconds. models) and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, SPA1097 ¼ The supplemental air bag warning light unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG flashes intermittently. warning light will remain illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these WARNING LIGHT ¼ The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. systems should be done only by a NISSAN The supplemental air bag warning light, display- dealer. Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air ing in the instrument panel, monitors the When maintenance work is required on the bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems circuits of the supplemental front-impact air bag, vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain may not operate properly. They must be checked air bags, pretensioners and related parts should front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air and repaired. Take your vehicle to a NISSAN be pointed out to the person conducting the bag (if so equipped), roof-mounted curtain side- dealer. impact supplemental air bag (if so equipped for maintenance. The ignition key should always be Coupe models) and seat belt pretensioner sys- in the LOCK position when working under the tems. The monitored circuits include the Air bag WARNING hood or inside the vehicle. Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, occupant classification system, front air If the supplemental air bag warning bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain air light is on, it could mean that the front

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ WARNING cedures could cause personal injury.

¼ Once a front air bag, side air bag or curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, if any of the front air bags inflate, the activated pretensioners must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioners should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and pretensioner system cannot be repaired. ¼ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and pretensioner systems should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. ¼ If you need to dispose of these supplemental systems or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Ser- vice Manual. Incorrect disposal pro-

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MEMO

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel ...... 2-2 Daytime running light system (Canada only) ...... 2-25 Meters and gauges ...... 2-3 Turn signal switch ...... 2-26 Speedometer and odometer ...... 2-4 Instrument brightness control ...... 2-26 Tachometer ...... 2-5 Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 2-27 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-5 Horn ...... 2-27 Fuel gauge ...... 2-6 Heated seats (if so equipped) ...... 2-28 Engine oil pressure gauge ...... 2-7 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch Volt meter ...... 2-8 (if so equipped) ...... 2-29 Trip computer ...... 2-8 Traction Control System (TCS) off switch Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ...... 2-11 (if so equipped) ...... 2-29 Checking bulbs ...... 2-11 Clock ...... 2-30 Warning lights ...... 2-11 Adjusting the time ...... 2-30 Indicator lights ...... 2-15 Power outlet ...... 2-31 Audible reminders ...... 2-17 Storage ...... 2-32 Security systems ...... 2-18 Instrument pocket (except for navigation system Vehicle security system ...... 2-18 equipped models) ...... 2-32 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 2-19 Sunglasses holder (Coupe models) ...... 2-32 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...... 2-21 Cargo net...... 2-33 Rear window wiper and washer switch Cup holders ...... 2-33 (Coupe models) ...... 2-22 Console box ...... 2-35 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch .... 2-23 Rear floor box ...... 2-35 Headlight and turn signal switch ...... 2-24 Rear parcel box ...... 2-37 Xenon headlights ...... 2-24 Stowing golf bags ...... 2-37 Headlight switch ...... 2-24 Coat hook (Coupe models) ...... 2-38

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Windows ...... 2-39 HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so equipped).... 2-43 Power windows ...... 2-39 Programming HomeLink ...... 2-43 Automatic adjusting function ...... 2-40 Programming HomeLink for Canadian Interior lights ...... 2-41 customers ...... 2-45 Room light ...... 2-41 Operating the HomeLink Universal Transceiver ...... 2-45 Map lights ...... 2-41 Programming trouble-diagnosis ...... 2-45 Vanity mirror light ...... 2-42 Clearing the programmed information ...... 2-45 Luggage compartment light (Coupe models) ...... 2-42 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button ...... 2-45 Trunk light (Roadster models)...... 2-42 If your vehicle is stolen ...... 2-46

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ INSTRUMENT PANEL

11. Side ventilator 12. Soft top operating switch (for Roadster models) 13. VDC (Vehicle dynamic control) OFF switch (if so equipped) or TCS (Traction control system) OFF switch (if so equipped) 14. Fuel-filler door opener switch 15. Hood lock release handle 16. Fuse box 17. Tilting steering wheel lock lever 18. Ignition switch/steering lock 19. Navigation system display* or Instrument pocket 20. Audio system/Clock 21. Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch 22. Hazard warning flasher switch 23. Cup holder 24. Heated seat switch (if so equipped) 25. Heater/air conditioner control 26. Power outlet *: Refer to the separate Navigation System SIC3266 Owner’s Manual. 1. Headlight/turn signal switch 6. Cruise control main/set switch 2. Instrument brightness control switch (if so equipped) 3. Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so 7. Trip computer mode/setting switch equipped) or switch for Bluetooth Hands- 8. Wiper/washer switch Free Phone System (if so equipped) 4. Driver supplemental air bag/Horn 9. Center ventilator 5. Meters/gauges 10. Passenger supplemental air bag 2-2 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ METERS AND GAUGES

8. Automatic transmission position indicator or Manual transmission shift up indicator (See “Driving the vehicle” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.) 9. Reset knob for trip odometer 10. Odometer (Total/Twin trip) 11. Trip computer setting switch (See “Trip computer” later in this section.) 12. Trip computer mode switch (See “Trip computer” later in this section.)

SIC3329 Combination meter: 5. Instrument brightness control switch (See “Headlight and turn signal switch” later 1. Warning/Indicator lights in this section.) 2. Turn signal/hazard indicator lights 6. Fuel gauge 3. Tachometer 7. Engine coolant temperature gauge 4. Speedometer Instruments and controls 2-3

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

SIC1948 SIC1949A

Triple meter: k1 Speedometer k2 Odometer 1. Trip computer k3 Twin trip odometer 2. Engine oil pressure gauge k4 Reset knob for trip odometer 3. Volt meter SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Odometer/Twin trip odometer The odometer/twin trip odometer are displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON position. 2-4 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Changing the display: Pushing the reset knob changes the display as follows: TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A Resetting the trip odometer: Pushing the reset knob for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.

SIC3328 SIC2371A TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo- GAUGE lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem- the red zone kA . perature. The engine coolant temperature is within the CAUTION normal range kA when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration. When engine speed approaches the red The engine coolant temperature will vary with the zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce outside air temperature and driving conditions. engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

Instruments and controls 2-5

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ The low fuel warning light comes on when CAUTION the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches the E position. There will be If the gauge indicates a coolant tem- a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the perature near the hot (H) end of the fuel gauge needle reaches the E position. normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease the temperature. If the gauge The indicates that the fuel-filler door is is over the normal range, stop the ve- located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. hicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued opera- CAUTION tion of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See “If your vehicle ¼ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the overheats” in the “6. In case of emer- malfunction indicator light gency” section for immediate action re- SIC2556 (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon quired. FUEL GAUGE as possible. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off. If the The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in light remains on after a few driving the tank. trips, have the vehicle inspected by a The gauge may move slightly during braking, NISSAN dealer. turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill. ¼ For additional information, see “Mal- The gauge needle is designed to move to the E function indicator light (MIL)” later in (Empty) position when the ignition key is turned this section. to the OFF position. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis- ters the E (Empty) position.

2-6 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ operation in such a condition could cause serious damage to the engine.

SIC1954A SIC1953A Type A Type B ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE CAUTION The gauge indicates the engine lubrication system oil pressure while the engine is running. When the engine speed is high, the engine oil ¼ This gauge is not designed to indi- pressure is also high. When it is low, the gauge cate low engine oil level. Use the indicates the low oil pressure. dipstick to check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.) ¼ If the gauge needle does not move with the proper amount of engine oil, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. Continued vehicle

Instruments and controls 2-7

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SIC1955 SIC3357 SIC2997 VOLT METER TRIP COMPUTER Switches for the trip computer are located on the side of the combination meter panel. To When the ignition switch is turned to the ON The display of the trip computer is situated in the operate the trip computer, push the side of the position, the volt meter indicates the battery triple meter. When the ignition switch is turned switches as shown above. voltage; while the engine is running, it indicates to ON, the display scrolls all the modes of the the alternator voltage of 11 - 15 volts (normal trip computer and then shows the mode chosen kA : Trip computer mode switch range kA ). However, while cranking the engine, before the ignition switch is turned OFF. kB : Trip computer setting switch the volts drop below the normal range. When the ignition switch is turned to ON, modes If the needle is not in the normal range kA while of the trip computer can be selected by pushing the engine is running, it may indicate that the the trip computer mode switch kA . charging system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Each time the mode switch kA is pushed, the display will change as follows: Speed indicator → Outside air temperature (ICY) → Distance to empty (dte) → Average fuel 2-8 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ consumption and speed → Elapsed time and by road or engine heat, wind directions and turned OFF may continue to be dis- trip odometer → Stopwatch → Up-shift indica- other driving conditions. The display may differ played. tor setting (for M/T models) → Speed indicator from the actual ambient temperature or the ¼ When driving uphill or rounding curves, temperature displayed on various signs or bill- the fuel in the tank shifts, which may Speed indicator (mph or km/h) boards. momentarily change the display. The vehicle speed is displayed in MPH or km/h Distance to empty (dte — mls or km) while driving. Average fuel consumption The speed indicator in the trip computer The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you (mpg or l (liter)/100 km) and speed indicates the reference speed. The actual with an estimation of the distance that can be (av. mph or av. km/h) speed indicated by the speedometer (com- driven before refueling. The dte is constantly bination meter) may differ from the one in being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in Fuel consumption: the trip computer. the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. The average fuel consumption mode shows the Outside air temperature The display is updated every 30 seconds. average fuel consumption since the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the trip computer (ICY—°For°C) The dte mode includes a low range warning setting switch kB for more than approximately 1 The outside air temperature is displayed in °F or feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode second. (The average speed is also reset at the °C in the range of −22 to 131°F (−30 to 55°C). is automatically selected and the digits blink in same time.) order to draw the driver’s attention. Press the The outside air temperature mode includes a low mode switch kA if you wish to return to the mode The display is updated every 30 seconds. At temperature warning feature: below 37°F (3°C), that was selected before the warning occurred. about the first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the outside air temperature mode is automati- The dte indicator will remain blinking until the the display shows (----). cally selected and the ICY indicator will illumi- vehicle is refueled. nate in order to draw the driver’s attention. Push Speed: k the mode switch A if you wish to return to the When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte The average speed mode shows the average mode that was selected before the warning display will change to (----). vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is occurred. The ICY indicator will continue blink- NOTE: done by pushing the setting switch kB for more ing as long as the temperature remains below than approximately 1 second. (The average fuel 39°F (4°C). ¼ If the amount of fuel added while the consumption is also reset at the same time.) The ambient temperature sensor is located in ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis- front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected play just before the ignition switch is The display is updated every 30 seconds. The Instruments and controls 2-9

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows Even if the display is switched to the other mode Display priority (----). while the time is starting, the stopwatch continues to advance until you stop the time in the If a low outside air temperature warning, Elapsed time (h:m:s) and trip stopwatch mode. When the ignition switch is low dte (distance to empty) range warning odometer (mls or km) turned to the OFF position, the time is reset. and low tire pressure warning occur simultaneously, other display modes switch au- Elapsed time: Up-shift indicator setting (rpm) (for tomatically to the outside air temperature display. The elapsed time mode shows the time since the manual transmission models) last reset. The displayed time can be reset by The up-shift indicator setting mode is used to When trip computer mode switch kA is pushing the trip computer setting switch kB for set the desired engine speed (rpm) for the pressed, the display switches to the mode more than approximately 1 second. (The trip up-shift indicator (situated in the tachometer) to chosen before the warning display, but the odometer is also reset at the same time.) illuminate. When the engine speed approaches ICY indicator will continue blinking. Trip odometer: or reaches the set figure, the up-shift indicator will flash or illuminate to show the driver the The trip odometer mode shows the total dis- timing for shifting into a higher gear. See “Driving tance the vehicle has been driven since the last the vehicle” in the “5. Starting and driving” reset. Resetting is done by pushing the setting section for the use of the up-shift indicator. switch kB for more than approximately 1 second. (The elapsed time is also reset at the same time.) When the up-shift indicator setting mode is selected, the rpm indicator blinks and the engine Stopwatch (h:m:s) speed currently set is displayed. (The initial factory setting is 7,500 rpm.) The figure can be You can use the trip computer as a stopwatch. k changed between 2,000 and 9,000 rpm by Each time the trip computer setting switch B is pushing trip computer setting switch kB . Press- pushed, the stopwatch will be operated as fol- ing the switch for less than approximately 1 lows: second will add the figure by 100 rpm. If pushing for more than approximately 1 second, the figure will increase by 500 rpm. If the battery cable is disconnected, the set After 100 hours, the time will start from the reset engine speed will be returned to the initial figure display again. (7,500 rpm). 2-10 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Anti-lock Braking System or Low washer fluid warning light High beam indicator light (Blue) (ABS) warning light Automatic transmission check warning Seat belt warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) light (A/T models)

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Slip indicator light

Automatic transmission position indicator Traction Control System (TCS) off indica- Charge warning light light (A/T models) tor light (if so equipped) Cruise main switch indicator light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indi- Door open warning light (if so equipped) cator light (if so equipped) Cruise set switch indicator light Engine oil pressure warning light Soft top indicator light (Roadster models) (if so equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

CHECKING BULBS trical system. Have the system repaired If the ABS warning light illuminates while the Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key promptly. engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the to ON without starting the engine. The following WARNING LIGHTS lights will come on: system checked by a NISSAN dealer. , or , , or Anti-lock Braking If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock The following lights come on briefly and then go System (ABS) function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assis- off: warning light tance. See “Brake system” in the “5. Starting , or , , , , and driving” section. , When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the elec- the ABS is operational. Instruments and controls 2-11

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Automatic transmission check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning warning light (A/T models) WARNING indicator: When the ignition switch is turned to the ON When the parking brake is released and the position, the automatic transmission check ¼ Your brake system may not be work- brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake warning light comes on and then turns off. This ing properly if the warning light is on. warning light and the ABS warning light illumi- indicates that the automatic transmission system Driving could be dangerous. If you nate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning is operational. judge it to be safe, drive carefully to properly. Have the brake system checked by a If the light comes on while the engine is running the nearest service station for re- NISSAN dealer. See “Anti-lock Braking System or while driving, it may indicate that the auto- pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle (ABS) warning light” earlier in this section. matic transmission system is not functioning towed because driving it could be properly. Have a NISSAN dealer check and Charge warning light repair the transmission. dangerous. ¼ If the light comes on while the engine is running, or Brake warning light Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and This light functions for both the parking brake fluid level may increase your stop- check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, and the foot brake systems. ping distance and braking will re- broken, missing or if the light remains on, see a quire greater pedal effort as well as Parking brake indicator: NISSAN dealer immediately. pedal travel. When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is ¼ If the brake fluid level is below the CAUTION applied. MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the Low brake fluid warning light: Do not continue driving if the belt is brake system has been checked at a loose, broken or missing. The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the NISSAN dealer. light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the Door open warning light and perform the following: warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer. This light comes on when any of the doors 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See “Brake and clutch fluid” in the and/or rear hatch are not closed securely while “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. the ignition switch is in the ON position. 2-12 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Engine oil pressure warning tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not turned ON. The light will remain on after 1 light functioning properly. minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light light flickers or comes on during normal driving, illuminates for about 1 second and turns off. For additional information, see “Tire pressure pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting Low tire pressure warning: immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other and driving” section. authorized repair shop. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres- The engine oil pressure warning light is not sure, the warning light will illuminate. WARNING designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the When the low tire pressure warning light illumi- dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres- ¼ If the light does not illuminate with oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sure to the recommended COLD tire pressure the ignition switch turned ON, have section. shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. the vehicle checked by a NISSAN The low tire pressure warning light does not dealer as soon as possible. CAUTION automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recom- ¼ If the light illuminates while driving, mended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at avoid sudden steering maneuvers or Running the engine with the engine oil speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pressure warning light on could cause TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning pull off the road to a safe location serious damage to the engine almost light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire and stop the vehicle as soon as pos- immediately. Turn off the engine as pressure. sible. Driving with under-inflated soon as it is safe to do so. For additional information, see “Tire pressure tires may permanently damage the monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting tires and increase the likelihood of Low tire pressure warning light and driving” section and in the “6. In case of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage emergency” section. could occur and may lead to an acci- Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure TPMS malfunction: dent and could result in serious per- Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire sonal injury. Check the tire pressure pressure of all tires except the spare. If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low for all four tires. Adjust the tire pres- tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi- The low tire pressure warning light warns of low mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is Instruments and controls 2-13

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened sure to the recommended COLD tire CAUTION when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For pressure shown on the Tire and 5 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON Loading Information label to turn the ¼ The TPMS is not a substitute for the position, the system does not activate the warn- low tire pressure warning light OFF. regular tire pressure check. Be sure ing light for the front passenger. If the light stays on after adjusting to check the tire pressure regularly. See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat the tire pressure and driving over 16 belts and supplemental restraint system” section ¼ If the vehicle is being driven at MPH (25 km/h), have the system for precautions on seat belt usage. checked by a NISSAN dealer. If you speeds of less than 16 MPH (25 have a flat tire, replace it with a spare km/h), the TPMS may not operate Supplemental air bag warning tire as soon as possible. correctly. light ¼ When a spare tire is mounted or a ¼ Be sure to install the specified size of After turning the ignition key to the ON position, wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not tires to the front and rear. the supplemental air bag warning light will illu- function and the low tire pressure minate. The supplemental air bag warning light warning light will flash for approxi- will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is mately 1 minute. The light will remain Low washer fluid warning light operational. on after 1 minute. Contact your This light comes on when the washer fluid is at a If any of the following conditions occur, the front NISSAN dealer as soon as possible low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. See air bag, side air bag (if so equipped) and curtain for tire replacement and/or system “Window washer fluid” in the “8. Maintenance air bag (if so equipped), and pretensioner sys- resetting. and do-it-yourself” section. tems need servicing and your vehicle must be ¼ Replacing tires with those not origi- Seat belt warning light taken to a NISSAN dealer. nally specified by NISSAN could af- ¼ The seat belt warning light and chime remind you The supplemental air bag warning light re- fect the proper operation of the to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates when- mains on after approximately 7 seconds. TPMS. ever the ignition key is turned to ON, and will ¼ The supplemental air bag warning light remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is flashes intermittently. fastened. ¼ The supplemental air bag warning light does The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if not come on at all. 2-14 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental mission) in the “5. Starting and driving” section. High beam indicator light restraint system (air bag system) and/or the (Blue) pretensioners may not function properly. For Cruise main switch indicator additional information, see “Supplemental re- light (if so equipped) This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is straint system” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat The light comes on when the cruise control main selected. belts and supplemental restraint system” sec- switch is pushed. The light goes out when the tion. main switch is pushed again. When the cruise Malfunction Indicator Light main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise (MIL) WARNING control system is operational. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on Cruise set switch indicator If the supplemental air bag warning steady or blinks while the engine is running, it light is on, it could mean that the front light (if so equipped) may indicate a potential emission control malfunction. air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag The light comes on while the vehicle speed is and/or pretensioner systems will not controlled by the cruise control system. If the The malfunction indicator light may also come on operate in an accident. To help avoid light blinks while the engine is running, it may steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or injury to yourself or others, have your indicate the cruise control system is not func- if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as tioning properly. Have the system checked by a the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, soon as possible. NISSAN dealer. and that the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons (14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. Front passenger air bag status light After a few driving trips, the light should INDICATOR LIGHTS turn off if no other potential emission control The front passenger air bag status light system malfunction exists. Automatic transmission ( ) will be lit and the passenger front air bag If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 position indicator light (A/T will be OFF depending on how the front passen- seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when models) ger seat is being used. the engine is not running, it indicates that the When the ignition key is turned to the ON For front passenger air bag status light opera- vehicle is not ready for an emission control position, the indicator in the tachometer shows tion, see “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System” in system inspection/maintenance test. See the automatic transmission selector lever posi- the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple- “Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) tion. See “Driving the vehicle” (automatic trans- mental restraint system” section of this manual. test” in the “9. Technical and consumer informa- Instruments and controls 2-15

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ tion” section of this manual. Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN Traction Control System (TCS) dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle Operation off indicator light (if so towed to the dealer. equipped) The malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways: CAUTION The light comes on when the Traction Control ¼ Malfunction indicator light on steady — An System (TCS) off switch is pushed to OFF. This emission control system malfunction has Continued vehicle operation without indicates the TCS is not operating. been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If the having the emission control system This light also comes on when the ignition switch fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or checked and repaired as necessary is turned to the ON position. The light will turn off install the cap and continue to drive the could lead to poor driveability, reduced if the TCS is operational. vehicle. The light should turn off after a fuel economy, and possible damage to When the TCS off indicator light and slip indi- few driving trips. If the light does not the emission control system. turn off after a few driving trips, have the cator light come on with the TCS turned on, this vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You light alerts the driver to the fact that the system’s do not need to have your vehicle towed to the Slip indicator light fail-safe mode is operating, that is the TCS may dealer. not be functioning properly. Have the system The light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic ¼ checked by a NISSAN dealer. If a malfunction Malfunction indicator light blinking — An en- Control (VDC) system or the Traction Control occurs in the system, the traction control func- gine misfire has been detected which may System (TCS) is operating, thus alerting the tion will be canceled but the vehicle is still damage the emission control system. To re- driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery driveable. For additional information, see “Trac- duce or avoid emission control system dam- and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. tion Control System (TCS)” in the “5. Starting age: This light also comes on when the ignition switch and driving” section of this manual. a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH is turned to the ON position. The light will turn off Vehicle Dynamic Control (72 km/h). if the VDC or TCS is operational. b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. (VDC) off indicator light (if so c) Avoid steep uphill grades. equipped) d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo The light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic being hauled or towed. Control (VDC) off switch is pushed to OFF. This The malfunction indicator light may stop indicates the VDC system and Traction Control blinking and come on steady. System (TCS) are not operating. 2-16 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ This light also comes on when the ignition switch Turn signal/hazard indicator is turned to the ON position. The light will turn off CAUTION lights if the VDC system is operational. The light flashes when the turn signal switch When the VDC off indicator light and slip indi- Operate the soft top with the engine lever or hazard switch is turned on. cator light come on with the VDC system turned running to prevent a discharged battery. on, this light alerts the driver to the fact that the AUDIBLE REMINDERS system’s fail-safe mode is operating, that is the VDC system may not be functioning properly. When the soft top is in motion, and any of the Key reminder chime Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. above conditions are discontinued or the pas- If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC senger power seat switches (on the cushion or The chime will sound if the driver’s side door is system function will be canceled but the vehicle the seatback) are operated, the top will stop opened while the key is left in the ignition switch is still driveable. For additional information, see moving. Remove your hand from the operating (ignition switch is turned off). Remove the key “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the switch, and push it again under the above and take it with you when leaving the vehicle. “5. Starting and driving” section of this manual. conditions until the top is fully opened or closed. The soft top indicator light will turn off when the Light reminder chime Soft top indicator light top open operation is completely finished. When The chime will sound when the driver’s door is closing the top, the light, which is illuminated, (Roadster models) opened with the headlight switch on unless the will begin to flash when the top close operation key is in the ignition switch. Make sure to turn the This light illuminates when the soft top is being is completely finished. Securely engage the top operated or it is stopped before reaching a full to the vehicle by operating the top latch lever. light switch off when you leave the vehicle. open/close state. When the top is fully opened, The light will turn off. the light will turn off. When the top is fully closed, Seat belt warning chime the light will flash. If the soft top indicator light flashes with the The chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless ignition switch ON (whether the top is operated the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened. The soft top can be moved with the soft top or not, and when the top is engaged), it may operating switch only under all of the following indicate the electric soft top control unit is not Brake pad wear warning conditions: functioning properly. Have your vehicle checked ¼ by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. The disc brake pads have audible wear warn- When the vehicle is stopped. ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it ¼ When the foot brake pedal is depressed. For more details about the electric soft top will make a high pitched scraping sound when operation, see “Soft top” in the “3. Pre-driving ¼ the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake When the ignition switch is ON. checks and adjustments” section. pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as Instruments and controls 2-17

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SECURITY SYSTEMS soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. moved or when a vibration occurs. The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto sup- ply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer SIC2132 may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible Your vehicle has two types of security systems, for discounts for various theft protection fea- as follows: tures. ¼ Vehicle Security System ¼ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors or rear hatch/trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is 2-18 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 3. Close and lock all doors and rear hatch/trunk UNLOCK button on the keyfob. lid. The alarm is activated by: Lock all doors by using the key or the keyfob. ¼ Opening the door without using the key or When using the keyfob, the hazard indicators keyfob. flash twice to indicate all doors are locked. ¼ Opening the rear hatch or the trunk lid with- 4. Confirm that the security indicator light out using the keyfob. comes on. The security indicator light glows for about 30 seconds and then blinks. The How to stop an activated alarm system is now activated. If, during this 30 second time period, the door is unlocked by The alarm will stop only by unlocking a door with the key or the keyfob, or the ignition key is the key, or by pushing the UNLOCK but- turned to ACC or ON, the system will not ton on keyfob. The alarm will not stop if the activate. ignition key is turned to ACC or ON. SIC1699A Even when the driver and/or passengers If the system does not operate as de- Security indicator light are in the vehicle, the system will activate scribed above, have it checked by a with all doors and rear hatch/trunk lid NISSAN dealer. This light kA blinks whenever the ignition switch locked and ignition key off. Turn the igni- is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This is tion key to ACC to turn the system off. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER normal. SYSTEM Vehicle security system activation How to arm the vehicle security The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not system The security system will give the following alarm: allow the engine to start without the use of the ¼ registered key. 1. Close all windows. The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. If the engine fails to start using the registered key The system can be activated even if the ¼ The alarm automatically turns off after ap- (for example, when interference is caused by windows are open. proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm another registered key, an automated toll road 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with device or automated payment device on the key again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking ring), restart the engine using the following a door with the key, or by pushing the procedures: Instruments and controls 2-19

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD for approximately 5 seconds. VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER- ATE THE EQUIPMENT. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key. If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. SIC1699A Statement related to section 15 of FCC rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- Security indicator light tem (CONT ASSY-BCM, ANT ASSY- IMMOBILISER) This light kA blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This This device complies with part 15 of the function indicates the security system equipped FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry on the vehicle is operational. Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept ignition switch is in the ON position. any interference received, including inter- If the light still remains on and/or the ference that may cause undesired opera- engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer tion of the device. for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX- service as soon as possible. Bring all reg- PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE- istered keys that you have when visiting a 2-20 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH NISSAN dealer for service. washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times. WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

SIC2998 CAUTION The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. ¼ Do not operate the washer continu- Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the ously for more than 30 seconds. following speed: ¼ Do not operate the washer if the k1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation reservoir tank is empty. can be adjusted by turning the knob toward ¼ Do not fill the window washer reser- kA (Slower) or kB (Faster). voir tank with washer fluid concen- k2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation trates at full strength. Some methyl k3 High (HI) — continuous high speed operation alcohol based washer fluid concen- k trates may permanently stain the Push the lever up 4 to have one sweep grille if spilled while filling the win- operation (MIST) of the wiper. dow washer reservoir tank. Pull the lever toward you k5 to operate the Instruments and controls 2-21

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH (Coupe models) ¼ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates WARNING with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the In freezing temperatures the washer so- fluid into the window washer reser- lution may freeze on the rear window voir tank. Do not use the window and obscure your vision. Warm the rear washer reservoir tank to mix the window with the defroster before you washer fluid concentrate and water. wash the rear window.

CAUTION

SIC3297 ¼ If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper The rear window wiper and washer operate may stop moving to protect its motor. when the ignition switch is in the ON position. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position OFF and remove the snow or ice on to operate the wiper. and around the wiper arms. After k1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation about 1 minute, turn the switch ON (not adjustable) again to operate the wiper. k2 Low (ON) — continuous low speed operation ¼ Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. Push the switch forward k3 to operate the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several ¼ Do not operate the washer if the times. reservoir tank is empty. ¼ Do not fill the window washer reser-

2-22 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH

voir tank with washer fluid concen- froster. trates at full strength. Some methyl ¼ Do not use the rear window defroster alcohol based washer fluid concen- switch while the soft top is being trates may permanently stain the operated or fully opened. The heat grille if spilled while filling the win- may damage the top material and/or dow washer reservoir tank. components. (for Roadster models) ¼ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the SIC3000 washer fluid concentrate and water. To defog/defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors, start the engine and push the switch on. The indicator light kA will come on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

¼ When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window de-

Instruments and controls 2-23

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH XENON HEADLIGHTS ¼ The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on-off operation. It is generally desirable not to turn off WARNING the headlights for short intervals (for example, when the vehicle stops at a HIGH VOLTAGE traffic signal). Even when the daytime running lights are active (Canada only), the xenon headlights do not turn on. ¼ When xenon headlights are on, they This way the life of the xenon headlights produce a high voltage. To prevent an is not reduced. electric shock, never attempt to ¼ If the xenon headlight bulb is close to modify or disassemble. Always have burning out, the brightness will drasti- your xenon headlights replaced at a cally decrease, the light will start blink- NISSAN dealer. ing, or the color of the light will become SIC3291 ¼ Xenon headlights provide consider- reddish. If one or more of the above signs appear, contact a NISSAN dealer. ably more light than conventional HEADLIGHT SWITCH headlights. If they are not correctly aimed, they might temporarily blind Lighting an oncoming driver or the driver k1 Turn the switch to the position: ahead of you and cause a serious The front park, side marker, tail, license plate accident. If headlights are not aimed and instrument lights will come on. correctly, immediately take your ve- k hicle to a NISSAN dealer and have 2 Turn the switch to the position: the headlights adjusted correctly. Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on. When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its brightness or color varies slightly. However, the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

2-24 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch has CAUTION been turned to the OFF position. ¼ After the headlights automatically turn off with Use the headlights with the engine run- the headlight switch in the or po- ning to avoid discharging the vehicle sition, the headlights will illuminate again for 5 battery. minutes if the headlight switch is turned to the OFF position and then turned to the or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature SIC3315 automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn Headlight beam select the headlight switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid k1 To select the high beam, push the lever discharging the vehicle battery. forward. The high beam lights come on and the high beam indicator light illuminates. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM k2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam. (Canada only) k3 Pulling the lever toward you will flash the The headlights (low beam) automatically illumi- headlight high beam. nate when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights op- Battery saver system erate with the headlight switch in the OFF ¼ When the headlight switch is in the or position or in the position. position while the ignition switch is in If the parking brake is applied before the engine the ON position, the lights will automatically is started, the daytime running lights do not Instruments and controls 2-25

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is turned off.

SIC3316 SIC3001 TURN SIGNAL SWITCH INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL k1 Turn signal The instrument brightness control operates Move the lever up or down to signal the turning when the light switch is in the or direction. When the turn is completed, the turn position and the ignition switch is in the signals cancel automatically. ON position. k 2 Lane change signal To adjust the brightness of instrument panel To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or lights, press the control switches located on the down to the point where lights begin flashing. left side of the meter panel. Pressing the upper switch kA will brighten the lights. The lower switch kB will dim the lights. Repeatedly pressing the lower switch will turn the lights off.

2-26 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ HAZARD WARNING FLASHER HORN SWITCH

¼ Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. ¼ Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher will operate with the ignition switch in any position. SIC2475 SIC2195 Push the switch (located on the front part of the To sound the horn, push the center pad area of center console) on to warn other drivers when the steering wheel. you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash. WARNING Some state or provincial laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so switch while driving. could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tam- WARNING pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious per- ¼ If stopping for an emergency, be sure sonal injury. to move the vehicle well off the road.

Instruments and controls 2-27

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. ¼ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat The indicator light will remain on as long as should be removed immediately with the switch is on. a dry cloth. 3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or ¼ When cleaning the seat, never use before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any the switch to the OFF position k3 . similar materials. ¼ If any abnormalities are found or the CAUTION heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system ¼ The battery could be discharged if checked by a NISSAN dealer. the seat heater is operated while the SIC3002 engine is not running. ¼ The seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The Do not use the seat heater for ex- switches are located on the center console. tended periods or when no one is using the seat. 1. Start the engine. ¼ Do not put anything on the seat 2. Select heat range. which insulates heat, such as a blan- k1 For high heat, push the (High) side ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other- of the switch. wise, the seat may become overheated. k2 For low heat, push the (Low) side of the switch. ¼ Do not place anything hard or heavy k3 For no heat, the switch has a center OFF on the seat or pierce it with a pin or position between low and high. similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. The indicator light kA in the switch will illuminate when low or high is selected. 2-28 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (VDC) OFF SWITCH (if so (TCS) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped) equipped) engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “5. Start- ing and driving” section.

SIC1881 SIC1967 The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most Control System (TCS) on for most driving con- driving conditions. ditions. If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCS system reduces the engine output to reduce reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced The engine speed will be reduced even if the even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum If maximum engine power is needed to free a engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. turn the TCS off. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch switch (located on the lower side of the instru- (located on the lower side of the instrument ment panel). The indicator light will come panel). The indicator light will come on. on. Push it again or restart the engine to turn the Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the system back on. Instruments and controls 2-29

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ CLOCK

See “Traction Control System (TCS)” in the “5. The digital clock (in the audio unit) displays time Starting and driving” section. when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. If the battery cable is disconnected, the clock will reset its time and the correct time will not be indicated. Readjust the time.

SIC3003 ADJUSTING THE TIME Adjust the time in the following steps: 1. Switch the display to the clock adjusting mode. Type A (audio with 1 CD player): Push and hold the DISP (Clock) button kA until the clock display starts to flash. Type B (audio with 6 CD changer): Push and hold the RPT button kB until the clock display starts to flash. 2. Push the SEEK/TRACK button kC ( , ) to adjust the hour. Push the TUNE button kD ( , ) to adjust the 2-30 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ POWER OUTLET

minute. Pushing the or side will advance the time and the or side will turn back the time. 3. Push the DISP button kA (Type A), or RPT kB button (Type B) to finish the adjustment. Resetting Type A (audio with 1 CD player): Push the DISP kA and TUNE kD buttons. Type B (audio with 6 CD changer): Push the RPT kB and TUNE kD buttons. The time will be set to a time signal. For example, if these buttons are pushed while SIC2258 SIC1968 the time is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display Front Rear The power outlet is for powering electrical ac- will be reset to 8:00. If pushed while it is cessories such as cellular telephones. rear power outlets. Do not use between 8:30 and 8:59, the display will be reset double adapters or more than one to 9:00. At the same time the display will return accessory with a single power outlet. to the previous audio mode. CAUTION ¼ Use power outlet with the engine running to avoid discharging the ve- ¼ The outlet and plug may be hot dur- hicle battery. ing or immediately after use. ¼ Avoid using power outlets when the ¼ This power outlet is not designed for air conditioner, headlights or rear use with a cigarette lighter unit. window defroster is on. ¼ Do not use accessories that exceed a ¼ Before inserting or disconnecting a combined power draw of 12 volt, plug, be sure to turn off the power 120W (10A) for both the front and switch of electrical accessory being

Instruments and controls 2-31

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ STORAGE

used or the ACC power of the vehicle. ¼ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open. ¼ Do not allow water to contact the outlet. When not in use, be sure to close the lid.

SIC3004 SIC2317 INSTRUMENT POCKET (except for SUNGLASSES HOLDER (Coupe navigation system equipped models) models) To open the lid, push the knob up k1 . The sunglasses holder can be opened by pushing the button kA . To close, pull the lid down k2 . WARNING WARNING Keep the sunglasses holder closed Keep the pocket lid closed while driving while driving to prevent an accident. to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

2-32 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ CAUTION involved in a collision. ¼ The cargo restrained in the net must ¼ Do not use for anything other than not exceed 4 lb (2 kg) or the net may glasses. not stay secured. ¼ Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct CUP HOLDERS sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses. CAUTION

¼ Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to SIC3006 prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid CARGO NET is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. The net located under the instrument panel (passenger’s side) can be used to hold small ¼ Use only soft cups in the cup holder. objects. Hard objects can injure you in an accident. The net can be removed when necessary. WARNING

¼ Do not place sharp objects in the net. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury when the vehicle is moving or if the vehicle is

Instruments and controls 2-33

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SIC3007 SIC3384 SIC3008 Front Type B: Soft bottle holder Type A: Larger containers can be placed in the console k k box. Push the button 1 to open the console box CAUTION To open the cup holder, slide the lid 1 . lid. The partition kA can be removed. Install the partition plate into the slit k2 . ¼ Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident. ¼ Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers.

2-34 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SIC3385 SIC3010 SSS0203 Coupe model CONSOLE BOX If objects (coins, etc.) fall into the rear section of REAR FLOOR BOX the center console box, remove the rear wall kB Pushing the button k1 will open the lid slightly, of the box as shown, and pick up the objects. The rear floor box is located behind the passen- then pull up the lid manually k2 . The center ger’s seat. console box is equipped with a card holder kA . CAUTION Fold the passenger’s seatback forward to ac- The inside tray (cup holder and partitions) can cess the rear floor box. be removed by pulling it up. Be careful not to pinch your fingers Coupe model: Pull on the lever kA . k when removing the rear wall B . Roadster model: Push the upper portion of the power seatback tilt switch kB .

Instruments and controls 2-35

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SIC1975A SIC2377 The rear floor box may be opened by pulling the The rear floor box has additional space under the handle. The rear floor box light illuminates when bottom plate. the box lid is opened with the headlight switch ON. WARNING When locking k1 or unlocking k2 the rear floor box, use the master key. Keep rear floor box lid closed while SIC3348 driving to help prevent injury in an acci- Roadster model dent or a sudden stop. Return the passenger’s seatback to a locked position after using the rear floor box. Coupe model: Pull up on the lever kA and return the seatback. Roadster model: Push the lower portion of the power seatback tilt switch kB . 2-36 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ STOWING GOLF BAGS Follow the instructions here to stow golf bags in the rear cargo space of your vehicle. Normally two bags can be stowed in the luggage area (Coupe models) or one bag in the trunk (Road- ster models). However, in some cases you may not be able to stow the above number of golf bags in your vehicle, depending on their sizes or types.

SIC1977 REAR PARCEL BOX Push the upper part of the lid to open the rear parcel box. For models without the Navigation system, two boxes are available. WARNING SIC2196 Keep rear parcel box lid closed while Coupe models driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop. Normally, two standard golf bags can be stowed across the strut tower bar in the luggage area as illustrated (A and B). When stowing a golf bag A in the rear space, insert the top of the golf bag

Instruments and controls 2-37

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ into left side of the luggage area k1 then put the bag down k2 .

SIC2378 COAT HOOK (Coupe models) The hooks are locked above the side windows as shown in the illustration. CAUTION

SIC2237 Do not apply a total load of more than 2 Roadster models lb (1 kg) to a single hook. Normally, one standard golf bag C can be stowed in the trunk. Insert the top of the golf bag into left side of the trunk k1 then put the bag down k2 .

2-38 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS WARNING

¼ Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. ¼ Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknow- ingly activate switches or controls SIC3286 SIC3287 and become trapped in a window. Driver’s side power window switch Passenger side power window switch Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. 1. Driver side window The passenger side switch will open or close 2. Passenger side window only the corresponding window. To open or 3. Window lock button close the window, hold the switch down or up. The power windows operate when the ignition To open or close the window, push down kA or Locking passenger’s window key is in the ON position and for about 45 k seconds, after the ignition key is turned to the pull up B the switch and hold it. The main When the lock button kC is pushed in, only the OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows. driver side window can be opened or closed. passenger’s door is opened during this period of Push it in again to cancel. about 45 seconds, power to the windows is canceled. The power window switches will be deactivated during the soft top operation. (Roadster models)

Instruments and controls 2-39

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the AUTOMATIC ADJUSTING OFF position. FUNCTION Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may CAUTION be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs. When the battery cable is removed from the battery terminal, do not close either WARNING of the front doors. The automatic window adjusting function will not work, and the side roof panel/top side rail There are some small distances imme- may be damaged. diately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all SIC3288 passengers have their hands, etc., in- The power window has an automatic adjusting Automatic operation side the vehicle before closing the win- function. When the door is being opened, the dow. window is automatically lowered slightly to avoid To fully open or close the window, completely contact between the window and the side roof press or lift the switch and release it; it need not panel/top side rail. When the door is closed, the be held. The window will automatically open or Automatic window lowering (Roadster window is automatically raised slightly. close all the way. To stop the window, just press models) or lift the switch on the opposite side. When the soft top operating switch is pressed, Auto reverse function the power windows will automatically be low- If the control unit detects something caught in a ered completely. The windows do not rise auto- window as it moves up, the window will be matically after the soft top open/close operation immediately lowered. is completed. Use the power window switches to raise them. The auto reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for about 2-40 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ INTERIOR LIGHTS

ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The map and vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the following with the ignition switch in the ACC or OFF position: ¼ Opening or closing any door ¼ Locking or unlocking with the keyfob, a key or the power door lock switch ¼ Inserting or removing a key from the ignition switch SIC1980A SIC2238 These lights will turn on again when any of the Coupe models Roadster models ROOM LIGHT ¼ The key is removed from the ignition switch above operations is performed after the lights while all doors are closed. have turned off automatically. (The lights will turn The interior light has a two-position switch. (kA : off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the DOOR, kB : OFF) The interior light will turn off while the 30 second above as well.) timer is activated, when: When the switch is in the DOOR position, the light will illuminate when a door is opened. ¼ The driver’s door is locked either with the CAUTION keyfob, a key or the power door lock switch. The light will stay on for about 30 seconds when: ¼ ¼ The ignition switch is turned ON. Turn off the lights when you leave the ¼ The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key vehicle. or the power door lock switch while all doors MAP LIGHTS ¼ Do not use for extended periods of are closed. To turn on the light, push the plastic surface kC time with the engine stopped. This ¼ The driver’s door is opened and then closed of the light. Push it again to turn off the light. could result in a discharged battery. while the key is removed from the ignition When the map light stays on, it will auto- switch. matically turn off 30 minutes after the Instruments and controls 2-41

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ VANITY MIRROR LIGHT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT TRUNK LIGHT (Roadster models) (Coupe models) The light illuminates when the rear hatch is The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the light opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light will go off. will go off.

SIC1859 The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened. When the vanity mirror light stays on, it will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position. To turn on the light again, turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2-42 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped) The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of WARNING ¼ Your vehicle’s engine should be up to three individual hand-held transmitters into turned off while programming the one built-in device. ¼ Do not use the HomeLink Universal HomeLink Universal Transceiver. HomeLink Universal Transceiver: Transceiver with any garage door ¼ Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) opener that lacks safety stop and PROGRAMMING HomeLink devices such as garage doors, gates, home reverse features as required by fed- To program your HomeLink Transceiver to op- and office lighting, entry door locks and se- eral safety standards. (These stan- erate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener, curity systems. dards became effective for opener home or office lighting, you need to be at the ¼ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No models manufactured after April 1, same location as the device. Note: Garage door separate batteries are required. If the vehi- 1982). A garage door opener which openers (manufactured after 1996) have “rolling cle’s battery is discharged or is discon- cannot detect an object in the path of code protection”. To program a garage door nected, HomeLink will retain all program- a closing garage door and then auto- opener equipped with “rolling code protection”; ming. matically stop and reverse, does not you will need to use a ladder to get up to the garage door opener motor to be able to access Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver meet current federal safety stan- the training button. is programmed, retain the original trans- dards. Using a garage door opener mitter for future programming procedures without these features increases the (for example, new vehicle purchases). risk of serious injury or death. Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed ¼ HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons During the programming procedure, should be erased for security purposes. your garage door or security gate will For additional information, refer to “Pro- open or close (if the transmitter is gramming HomeLink ” later in this sec- within range). Make sure that people tion. and objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming.

Instruments and controls 2-43

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ when the device begins to activate. 5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid, HomeLink has picked up a “rolling code” garage door opener signal. You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLink to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another person for convenience. 6. Press and release the training button located on the garage door opener’s motor to activate the “training mode”. This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs SIC3012 SIC3011 down from the motor. If the wire originates 1. To begin, press and hold the 2 outer 3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and from under a light lens, you will need to HomeLink buttons (to clear the memory) hold both the HomeLink button you want to remove the lens to access the training button. until the indicator light kA blinks (after 20 program and the hand-held transmitter but- NOTE: seconds). Release both buttons. ton. Once you have pressed and released the 2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. training button on the garage door open- 1-3in(26-76mm)away from the er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you HomeLink surface. 4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator have 30 seconds in which to perform step light on the HomeLink flashes, changing 7. Use the help of a second person for from a “slow blink” to a “rapid blink”. When convenience to assist when performing the indicator light flashes rapidly, both but- this step. tons may be released. The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming. To 7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pressing and activate the garage door or other pro- releasing the garage door opener program grammed device, press and hold the pro- button, firmly press and release the grammed HomeLink button - releasing HomeLink button you’ve just programmed. 2-44 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Press and release the HomeLink button up NOTE: ¼ position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in to three times to complete the training. (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink When programming a garage door opener, surface. Hold the transmitter in that position 8. Your HomeLink button should now be pro- etc., it is advised to unplug the device for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not grammed. during the “cycling” process to prevent programmed within that time, try holding the possible damage to the garage door To program the remaining HomeLink buttons transmitter in another position - keeping the opener components. for additional door or gate openers, follow steps indicator light in view at all times. 2-8 only. OPERATING THE HomeLink If you continue to have programming difficulties, NOTE: UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department. The phone numbers are located in Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to The HomeLink Universal Transceiver (once the Foreword of this Owner’s Manual. “clear” all previously programmed programmed) may now be used to activate the HomeLink buttons. garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED appropriate programmed HomeLink Universal INFORMATION If you have any questions or are having difficulty Transceiver button. The red indicator light will programming your HomeLink buttons, refer to illuminate while the signal is being transmitted. Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com clear all programming, press and hold the two or call 1-800-355-3515. PROGRAMMING outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds). PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR TROUBLE-DIAGNOSIS CANADIAN CUSTOMERS If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE hand-held transmitter information: HomeLink BUTTON Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand- held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 ¼ replace the hand-held transmitter batteries To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Trans- seconds. To program your hand-held transmitter with new batteries. ceiver button, complete the following. to HomeLink , continue to press and hold the ¼ position the hand-held transmitter with its 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but- HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4 battery area facing away from the HomeLink ton. Do not release the button until step 4 under “Programming HomeLink ”) while you surface. has been completed. press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator ¼ press and hold both the HomeLink and 2. When the indicator light begins to flash light flashes rapidly (indicating successful pro- hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand- gramming). ruption. held transmitter 2 to 5 in (50 to 127 mm) Instruments and controls 2-45

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ away from the HomeLink surface. two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter device must accept any interference that button. may be received, including interference 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first that may cause undesired operation. slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator The transmitter has been tested and com- light begins to flash rapidly, release both plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. buttons. Changes or modifications not expressly The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button approved by the party responsible for com- has now been reprogrammed. The new device pliance could void the user’s authority to can be activated by pushing the HomeLink operate the device. button that was just programmed. This proce- DOC: ISTC 1763K1313 dure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons. FCC I.D.: CB2V67690 IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink . Consult the Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer- sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information. FCC Notice: This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is subject to the following 2-46 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MEMO

Instruments and controls 2-47

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MEMO

2-48 Instruments and controls

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ...... 3-2 Before operating the top ...... 3-13 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys...... 3-2 When operating the top ...... 3-15 Doors ...... 3-3 Opening the top ...... 3-18 Locking with key ...... 3-3 Closing the top ...... 3-19 Locking with inside lock knob ...... 3-4 If the top does not open or close electrically ...... 3-19 Locking with power door lock switch ...... 3-4 Care of the soft top and the vehicle body...... 3-22 Remote keyless entry system ...... 3-5 Fuel-filler door ...... 3-23 How to use remote keyless entry system ...... 3-6 Opener operation ...... 3-23 Hood ...... 3-9 Fuel-filler cap ...... 3-24 Rear hatch (Coupe models) ...... 3-9 Steering wheel ...... 3-25 Opener operation ...... 3-10 Tilt operation ...... 3-25 Secondary rear hatch release ...... 3-10 Sun visors...... 3-26 Trunk lid (Roadster models) ...... 3-11 Mirrors ...... 3-26 Opener operation ...... 3-11 Inside mirror ...... 3-26 Interior trunk lid release ...... 3-12 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror Secondary trunk lid release ...... 3-13 (if so equipped) ...... 3-27 Soft top (Roadster models)...... 3-13 Outside mirrors ...... 3-28

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ KEYS

duplicated by a NISSAN dealer. not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS CAUTION You can only drive your vehicle using the master or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN Do not allow the NISSAN Vehicle Immo- Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your bilizer System key, which contains an vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in electrical transponder, to come in con- the key head. tact with salt water. This could cause the The master key can be used for all the locks. system to malfunction. The valet key cannot be used for the rear floor box lock. To protect belongings when you leave SPA1379D a key with someone, give them the valet key only. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. 1. Master keys* 2. Valet key* Additional or replacement keys: 3. Key number plate If you still have a key, the key number is not (* With built-in transponder chip) necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli- Record the key number and keep it in a safe cate your existing key. As many as 5 keys can be place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If used with one vehicle. You should bring all the you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for registered keys that you have to a NISSAN duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the reg- does not record any key numbers so it is very istration process will erase the memory of all key important to keep track of your key number plate. codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registra- A key number is only necessary when you have tion process, these components will only recog- lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate nize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immo- from. If you still have a key, this key can be bilizer System during registration. Any key that is 3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ DOORS

will unlock the passenger’s door. WARNING Opening and closing windows ¼ Always have the doors locked while Turn the driver’s door key towards the front of driving. Along with the use of seat the vehicle (UNLOCK position) and hold for belts, this provides greater safety in about 1 second, all door windows will begin to lower. the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown To close all door windows, turn the key to the from the vehicle. This also helps keep LOCK position and hold for about 1 second. children and others from uninten- To stop opening or closing, turn the key to the tionally opening the doors, and will neutral position. help keep out intruders. In the event of a hand in the way, or other ¼ Before opening any door, always SPA1503A obstruction, the auto reverse function will acti- look for and avoid oncoming traffic. vate. LOCKING WITH KEY ¼ Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknow- The power door lock system allows you to lock ingly activate switches or controls. or unlock all doors including the rear hatch/trunk Unattended children could become lid simultaneously. involved in serious accidents. ¼ Turning the driver’s door key to the rear of the vehicle k1 will lock all doors including the rear hatch/trunk lid. ¼ Turning the driver’s door key one time to the front of the vehicle k2 will unlock the driver’s door and rear hatch/trunk lid. From that position, returning the key to neutral (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it to the front again within 5 seconds Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ passenger) is moved to the LOCK position k1 with the key in the ignition and any door open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.

SPA2420 SPA2320 LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR KNOB LOCK SWITCH Pushing the door inside lock knob to the LOCK All doors will be locked when the power door k1 or UNLOCK k2 position will lock or unlock lock switch is pushed to the LOCK position k1 the corresponding door. (The rear hatch/trunk lid with the driver’s or front passenger’s door open. lock is linked with the driver side door lock.) Then close the door and all doors will be locked. To individually lock the doors from the outside When locking the door this way, be certain (without a key), move the inside lock knob to the not to leave the key inside the vehicle. LOCK position. Then close the door. To unlock, push the power door lock switch to When locking the door without a key, be the UNLOCK position k2 . sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle. Lockout protection When the power door lock switch (driver or front 3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM It is possible to lock/unlock all doors (including the rear hatch/trunk lid), release the rear waves may affect aircraft navigation and vehicle. For information regarding the hatch/trunk lid and activate the panic alarm by communication systems. Do not operate erasing procedure, please contact a using the keyfob from outside the vehicle. the keyfob while on an airplane. Make NISSAN dealer. Before locking the doors, make sure the sure the buttons are not operated unin- key is not left in the vehicle. tentionally when the unit is stored dur- For information regarding the replacement of a The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi- ing a flight. mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The battery, see “Keyfob battery replacement” in the effective distance depends upon the conditions “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. around the vehicle.) As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one CAUTION vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN The following conditions or occurrences dealer. will damage the keyfob. The keyfob will not function when: ¼ Do not allow the keyfob to become ¼ the battery is discharged, wet. ¼ the distance between the vehicle and the ¼ Do not drop the keyfob. keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m). ¼ Do not strike the keyfob sharply The panic alarm and the rear hatch/trunk against another object. lid release will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch. ¼ Do not place the keyfob for an extended period in an area where tem- WARNING peratures exceed 140°F (60°C). If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN The remote keyless entry keyfob trans- recommends erasing the ID code of that mits radio waves when the buttons are keyfob. This will prevent the keyfob pushed. The FAA advises that the radio from unauthorized use to unlock the

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 4. All the doors will lock. ¼ The driver’s door and rear hatch/trunk lid unlock. All of the doors will lock when the LOCK button on the keyfob is pushed even ¼ The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors though a door remains open and/or the are completely closed with the ignition switch ignition switch is in the ON position. in any position except the ON position. ¼ 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the The interior light turns on and the light timer horn chirps once. activates for 30 seconds when the switch is in the DOOR position with the ignition switch ¼ When the LOCK button is pushed with in any position except the ON position. all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes 2. Push the UNLOCK button on the key- twice and the horn chirps once as a reminder fob again within 5 seconds. that the doors are already locked. ¼ Passenger’s door unlocks. SPA1918 *1: Doors lock with the keyfob while a key is in ¼ The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors k1 LOCK button the ignition switch. However, the panic are completely closed. alarm and the rear hatch/trunk lid release will k2 UNLOCK button All doors will be locked automatically unless one not activate when the key is in the ignition of the following operations is performed within 1 k3 HATCH/TRUNK button switch. minute of pushing the UNLOCK button. *2: Doors lock with the keyfob while the ignition k4 PANIC button ¼ switch is in the ON position. However, the Any door or rear hatch/trunk lid is opened. HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS hazard indicator and horn will not function. ¼ The ignition switch is turned to the ON ENTRY SYSTEM *3: Doors lock with the keyfob while any door is position. open. However, the hazard indicator and The interior light can be turned off without horn will not function. Locking doors waiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignition 1. Remove the ignition key.*1 *2 Unlocking doors switch to the ON position or by locking the doors with the keyfob. 2. Close all the doors.*3 1. Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob once. 3. Push the LOCK button on the keyfob.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Opening the windows The panic alarm stops when: ¼ Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob It has run for 30 seconds, or and the driver’s door will unlock. ¼ The LOCK button or the UNLOCK Continue to push the UNLOCK button for button is pushed, or 3 seconds. All the door windows will start to be ¼ The PANIC button or the lowered. Keep pushing the UNLOCK but- HATCH/TRUNK button is pushed on ton until the windows are fully open. the keyfob for longer than 0.5 second. To stop lowering the windows, release the UN- LOCK button. To start lowering the windows again, push the UNLOCK button again for 3 more seconds. Releasing the rear hatch/trunk lid 1. Push the HATCH/TRUNK button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 second with the key removed from the ignition switch. 2. The rear hatch (Coupe) or trunk lid (Road- ster) opens. Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention by pushing and holding the PANIC button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 second (with the key removed from the ignition switch). The theft warning alarm and headlights will stay on for 30 seconds. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ once and the horn chirps once.

SPA1260 Setting hazard indicator and horn button is pushed, the hazard indicator mode flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn horn operates. mode when you first receive the vehicle. (Switching procedure) In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indi- Push the LOCK and UNLOCK but- cator flashes twice and the horn chirps once. tons on the keyfob simultaneously for more than When the UNLOCK button is pushed, the 2 seconds to switch from one mode to the other. hazard indicator flashes once. When pushing the buttons to set hazard indica- If hazard indicator and horn mode is not neces- tor only mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3 sary, you can switch to hazard indicator only times. mode by following the switching procedure. When pushing the buttons to set hazard indica- In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCK tor and horn mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ HOOD REAR HATCH (Coupe models)

WARNING

Do not drive with the rear hatch open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Precautions when starting and driving” in the “5. Starting and driving” section for exhaust gas.

SPA2313

1. Pull the hood lock release handle k1 located hot immediately after the engine has been below the instrument panel; the hood will stopped. then spring up slightly. 2. Raise the lever k2 at the front of the hood WARNING with your fingertips and raise the hood. ¼ Make sure the hood is completely 3. Insert the assist bar into the slot k3 in the closed and latched before driving. front edge of the hood. Failure to do so could cause the hood 4. When closing the hood, reset the assist bar to fly open and result in an accident. to its original position, then slowly close the ¼ hood and make sure it locks into place. If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to k Hold the coated part A when removing or avoid injury do not open the hood. resetting the support rod. Avoid direct contact with the metal parts, as they may be Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ¼ Push the power door lock switch to the UNLOCK side. The rear hatch employs a spring component which enables you to lift up the hatch by one hand. Because of this, sometimes the rear hatch may clatter when the lock is released, but it is not a malfunction. To close, push the rear hatch down securely. The rear hatch release switch is linked with the driver side door lock. To open the rear hatch, unlock the driver side door.

SPA1507 SPA1556 OPENER OPERATION SECONDARY REAR HATCH The rear hatch release switch is located be- RELEASE tween the license plate lights. The secondary rear hatch release mechanism allows opening the rear hatch in the event of To open the rear hatch, unlock it with one of the discharged battery or emergency. following operations then push the release switch: The release (string) handle is located under the strut tower bar inside the luggage compartment. ¼ Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob once. (Pushing the HATCH/TRUNK To open the rear hatch from the inside, button on the keyfob can open the rear firmly pull the release handle to the direc- hatch at once without pushing the release tion shown above until the lock releases. switch.) ¼ Insert the key into the door key cylinder and turn the door key counterclockwise once. 3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ TRUNK LID (Roadster models)

¼ Push the power door lock switch to the WARNING UNLOCK side. (After locking the doors with a keyfob, this switch is not available due to the security system.) ¼ Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust To close, push the trunk lid down securely. gases to be drawn into the vehicle. The trunk lid release switch is linked with the See “Precautions when starting and driver side door lock. To open the trunk lid, driving” in the “5. Starting and driv- unlock the driver side door. ing” section for exhaust gas. ¼ Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously SPA1685 injured. Keep the car locked, with the trunk closed when not in use, and OPENER OPERATION prevent children’s access to car keys. The trunk lid release switch is located between the license plate lights. To open the trunk lid, unlock it with one of the following operations then push the release switch: ¼ Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob once. (Pushing the HATCH/TRUNK button on the keyfob can open the trunk lid at once without pushing the release switch.) ¼ Insert the key into the door key cylinder and turn it counterclockwise once. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk. The handle kA is located inside the trunk compartment as illustrated. To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull the release handle towards you until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release lever is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light.

SPA1686 SPA1687 Cancel switch INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE When the cancel switch (located inside the rear floor box) is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened WARNING with the release switch. It can be opened only by pushing the HATCH/TRUNK button on Closely supervise children when they the keyfob. are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the trunk closed when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SOFT TOP (Roadster models)

SPA1688 SPA2339 Interior/exterior view SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE 1. Soft top operating switch BEFORE OPERATING THE TOP The secondary trunk lid release mechanism al- 2. Soft top indicator light (on the combination The soft top of your 350Z Roadster is electrically lows opening the trunk lid in the event of dis- meter) operated. You can fully open or close the top charged battery or emergency. only by pressing the operating switch (on the 3. Top side rail lower side of the instrument panel). Remove the cover k1 (located inside of the rear 4. Top latch lever floor box) using a suitable tool k2 as shown. The soft top operating switch must be operated Access the release (string) handle k3 . 5. Soft top under all of the following conditions: To open the trunk lid from the inside, firmly 6. Top storage lid ¼ When the foot brake pedal is depressed. pull the release handle to the direction ¼ shown above until the lock releases. 7. Trunk lid When the vehicle is stopped. ¼ 8. Rear window When the engine is running. 9. Rear section of the top

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ CAUTION while moving. The top operating sys- face of the top completely before tem could also be damaged. opening it. Always keep the engine running while ¼ Do not operate the top in a strong ¼ Do not open the top when it is wet or operating the soft top. The top will also wind. It could be blown by the wind, damp. This may cause interior water operate when the ignition switch is in striking someone or damage the top. damage, stains or mildew on the top the ON position, but run the engine to material. ¼ Do not allow anyone to stand up or prevent a discharged battery. extend any portion of their body out ¼ Be sure to turn off the rear window of the opening while the vehicle is in defroster switch. Never turn it on Be sure to follow the operating instructions, and all the warnings and cautions in this section. motion or while the top is being op- while the top is being operated or Improper operation of the top could cause erated. fully opened. The heat may damage the top material. a system malfunction, damage, or deterio- ¼ In an accident you could be thrown ration of the top material and related parts. from the vehicle with an open top. Always use seat belts and proper WARNING child restraints.

¼ Park the vehicle in a safe and level place and apply the parking brake. CAUTION ¼ Make sure the area is clear of obstacles and there is enough clear- ¼ Do not operate the top when the ance over the top (for example, in a temperature is below 32°F (0°C). This garage or a covered area). More than may result in damage to the top ma- approximately 6.6 ft (2 m) from the terial or operating system. ground is required to open or close ¼ the top safely. Otherwise, the top Remove water drops, snow, ice or may damage any objects above it sand from the top, and dry the sur-

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ WHEN OPERATING THE TOP vehicle body. ¼ Do not place anything in the top stor- WARNING age area. The top will not fit there properly, and this could damage the Keep hands and other parts of the body top and/or the vehicle body. away from moving parts such as the top, ¼ Do not sit or place excessive weight storage lid and power windows. on the top and the storage lid, especially when the top is being operated. The top may be damaged. CAUTION ¼ Do not drive the vehicle with the top partially opened. Always make sure Keep all parts of the top linkage clear of SPA1701 the top is either fully opened or obstructions, or the top latch may not be closed before driving. securely locked. CAUTION ¼ Secure items so that they cannot be blown from the vehicle while driving ¼ Do not place any objects between the with the top open. top cloth and the structure. Doing so ¼ could interfere with top operation When a child restraint is installed in and cause damage to the top operat- the passenger seat, be sure to turn ing system or the objects. the seatback tilt cancel switch (located on the passenger seatback) to ¼ Do not place anything on the top and the CANCEL position, or the child the storage lid. Even small items may restraint may be damaged. interfere with the top operation and could cause damage to the top or the Make sure the trunk lid is securely closed before operating the top. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ NOTE: Top latch lever ¼ In case of low battery or low tempera- The soft top has three locking points to engage ture, the top may temporarily stop mov- the front edge of the top to the vehicle body. ing during the operation. This functions Operating the top latch lever enables you to lock to protect the top control mechanism, or unlock all three locking points at the same and it is not a malfunction. time. ¼ If the top is opened and closed repeatedly in a short period of time, it may stop moving to protect the top motor. CAUTION Wait for a few minutes before operating the top again. Before opening the top, be sure to release the top latch. After closing, securely engage the top to the vehicle body.

To release the latch (before opening the top):

k1 Push the safety switch kA .

k2 The latch lever kB is lowered. k3 Swing the lever forward until the latch is released. To engage the latch (after closing the top): Check that the top is in the fully closed position.

k1 Push the safety switch kA .

SPA1690 k2 The latch lever kB is lowered. 3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ k3 Rotate the lever forward until the front edge ¼ The foot brake pedal is released. of the top is completely joined to the vehicle ¼ body. The passenger power seat switch (on the cushion or the seatback) is operated. k4 Rotate the lever toward you and push it up into the stored position. Make sure the top is Remove your hand from the soft top operating securely engaged to the vehicle body. switch, and push the switch again to move the top to the fully opened or closed position. The The soft top indicator light will flash with the soft top indicator light will turn off when the top ignition switch ON when the top is not en- open operation is completely finished. When gaged. See “Soft top indicator light” later in closing the top, the light, which is illuminated, this section. will begin to flash when the top close operation When releasing or engaging the top latch, is completely finished. Securely engage the top you may hear the latch operating. This is to the vehicle body by operating the top latch normal and not a malfunction. lever. The light will turn off. SPA1691 If the soft top indicator light flashes with the Soft top indicator light ignition switch ON (whether the top is operated or not, and when the top is engaged), it may The soft top indicator light in the instrument indicate the top operating system is not func- panel shows the conditions of top operation. The tioning properly. Have your vehicle checked by a light illuminates when the soft top is being NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. operated or if it is stopped before reaching the fully opened or closed position. When the top is Automatic passenger seatback tilt fully opened, the light will turn off. When the top function is fully closed, the light will flash. The passenger seatback will automatically tilt When the soft top is in motion, and any of the forward when the soft top is operated. This following conditions occur, the top will stop function is designed to draw your passenger’s moving: attention to the rear section of the top, which will come into the passenger compartment from ¼ The vehicle is moved. behind during the top operation. The seatback ¼ The ignition switch is turned to OFF. will return to the original position when the entire Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ top operation is completed. CEL position and the passenger seat is occupied, ask the passenger to sit forward when the This automatic seatback movement will be top is being opened or closed. stopped: Automatic window lowering ¼ When the passenger seat sliding or reclining switch (on the seat cushion) is operated. When the soft top operating switch is pressed, ¼ the power windows will automatically be low- When the power seatback tilt switch (on the ered completely. The windows do not rise auto- seatback) is operated. matically after the top operation is completed. ¼ When the seatback tilt cancel switch is Use the power window switches to raise them. turned to the CANCEL position. Remove your hand from the soft top operating switch, and push it again to resume operation. The passenger seatback will start tilting forward SPA1692 again from the present position, and the soft top will start opening or closing. If the top movement OPENING THE TOP is interrupted at this time, the next time you 1. Apply the parking brake and move the selec- resume top operation, the seatback will first tilt tor lever to the P (Park) position (for the forward from the present position, then the top automatic transmission model) or the shift will start moving again. lever to the N (Neutral) position (for the If you need to cancel this function or when a manual transmission model). child restraint is installed in the passenger seat, 2. Start the engine. push the seatback tilt cancel switch to the CANCEL position. For the seatback tilt cancel 3. Depress the foot brake pedal. switch, see “Tilting and reclining passenger’s seat from driver’s seat” in the “1. Safety — 4. Release the front edge of the top from the Seats, seat belts and supplemental restrain sys- vehicle body with the top latch lever. tem” section. 5. Push OPEN on the soft top operating switch If the seatback tilt cancel switch is in the CAN- and hold it until the top is fully opened. 3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ • The soft top indicator light will illuminate seconds, the closing movement will fin- while the top is in motion. (In about 20 ish.) seconds, the opening movement will finish • and the indicator light turns off.) Windows will automatically be fully opened. • Windows will automatically be fully • opened. The passenger seatback will automatically move forward, unless the seatback tilt • The passenger seatback will automatically cancel switch is in the CANCEL position. move forward, unless the seatback tilt It will return to the original position after cancel switch is in the CANCEL position. the top operation. (See “Automatic pas- It will return to the original position after senger seatback tilt function” shown on the top operation. (See “Automatic pas- the previous page of this section.) senger seatback tilt function” shown on the previous page of this section.) 5. Release the switch when the top is fully SPA1693 closed. (The indicator light, which is illumi- 6. Release the switch when the top is fully nated, will begin to flash.) opened. (The indicator light turns off.) CLOSING THE TOP 6. Securely engage the front edge of the top to NOTE: 1. Apply the parking brake and move the selec- the vehicle body with the top latch lever. (The If you release the switch and press it again tor lever to the P (Park) position (for the indicator light turns off.) while the top is being opened, the top will automatic transmission model) or the shift IF THE TOP DOES NOT OPEN OR slightly move to the closing direction, then lever to the N (Neutral) position (for the CLOSE ELECTRICALLY start moving to the opening direction manual transmission model). again. The top is designed to move in this If you cannot operate the soft top with the 2. Start the engine. way. It is not a malfunction. operating switch, first check whether all the 3. Depress the foot brake pedal. following operating conditions are completed: 4. Push CLOSE on the soft top operating ¼ foot brake pedal is depressed switch and hold it until the top is fully closed. ¼ vehicle is stopped • The soft top indicator light will illuminate ¼ ignition switch is ON (Run the engine when while the top is in motion. (In about 20 operating the top.) Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ If the top still does not move under the above conditions or has any system malfunction, see a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. When you must close the top by yourself, in the event of emergency or when an immediate dealer service is not available, close the top manually according to the procedures shown in this section. When closing the soft top manually: ¼ Move the vehicle to a safe place, away from traffic. ¼ Two people should perform this procedure, as some of the top parts are extremely heavy.

The top cannot be opened manually. SPA1694 SPA1695 1. Open the trunk lid. In the event of discharged 2. Open the top storage lid WARNING battery, you need to open the trunk lid as a. Remove floorboard inside of the trunk. follows: ¼ Do not drive with the top partially b. Remove the harness connector kD of the a. Open the rear floor box behind the passenger storage lid motor installed on the back right opened. seat. side of the trunk by pulling in a downward ¼ If the top cannot be operated prop- b. Remove the cap kA using a suitable tool kB . direction. erly, see a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible to have your vehicle c. Pull the string handle (secondary trunk lid c. Pull down the lock release cable (right and release) kC until the trunk lid lock is released. left) kE . checked. d. Lift up the trunk lid. d. Listen for a clicking sound of the lock releasing. e. Pull up the storage lid from the left and right side of vehicle by hand.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ CAUTION

The storage lid is extremely heavy. Pull- ing it up should be done by two people.

SPA1734 SPA1708 Right side Left side 3. Close the soft top. b. A person on each side of the vehicle should a. Remove the harness connectors of the top slowly pull the top to the closed position. k k motor, F (right side of the vehicle) and H c. Latch the front edge of the top to the vehicle (left side). body with the top latch lever. 4. Push the storage lid down to the vehicle body CAUTION panel and close it. (Listen for locking sounds from both right and left sides of the lid.) Two harness connectors are installed on the right side and three on the left side as shown. Only the harness connectors kF and kH should be removed. (Do not remove the other harness connectors kG , kI and kJ .)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ you need to observe all the warnings and cau- and falls simultaneously. Support the tions shown in the previous pages. Also, to top by hand so it does not strike the maintain a good appearance of the soft top and body. the vehicle body, you need to care for them by cleaning and/or washing properly. b. Lower the rear part of the top and push it CAUTION onto the top storage lid. The top is locked to the storage lid, but the bottom of the rear part ¼ is not closed tightly. Do not use an automatic car wash or a high-pressure car wash to clean your vehicle. The top may be dam- CAUTION aged and water may leak into the inside of the vehicle. SPA1697 ¼ After closing the top manually, have the system checked and/or repaired ¼ Store the vehicle with the top closed 5. Lower the rear section of the top. by a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos- if it is not to be used for long periods. Keeping the top stowed for long pe- a. Remove the shock absorber kK which sup- sible. riods may cause wrinkles on the sur- ports the rear section of the top from the ¼ Avoid leaving the vehicle outside for vehicle body. (Both the left and right side face of the top. long periods or driving at high must be removed — the figure above shows the left side.) To remove the shock absorber, speeds. The rear of the top is not See “Cleaning exterior” in the “7. Appearance remove the holder kL on the terminal part locked completely, and this may al- and care” section for detailed instructions. using a flat-bladed screwdriver kM . low wind and rain to get into your vehicle. ¼ A protective clear tape is applied to the top CAUTION storage lid painted surface where the soft top contacts the surface. When the top is fully CARE OF THE SOFT TOP AND THE closed, the tape may transmit some light, When the shock absorber is removed, VEHICLE BODY visible from the inside of the vehicle. This the rear section of the top loses support does not affect the water and air tightness of To use your Roadster safely and comfortably, the seal. 3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ FUEL-FILLER DOOR

¼ The inner surface of the trunk and top storage lids may show a fibrous, or marbled pattern. This is the normal appearance of the material used in these parts.

SPA1508 OPENER OPERATION To open the fuel-filler door, push the opener switch located below the instrument panel. To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ¼ Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the malfunction indicator light to come on. ¼ Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable SPA2421 liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or FUEL-FILLER CAP trailer. To reduce the risk of serious highly explosive under certain condi- k injury or death when filling portable 1 To remove the fuel-filler cap, turn it counter- tions. You could be burned or seri- fuel containers: clockwise. ously injured if it is misused or mis- — Always place the container on the k2 Hang the string of the cap on the hook kA as handled. Always stop the engine and ground when filling. shown while refueling. do not smoke or allow open flames — Do not use electronic devices The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tighten or sparks near the vehicle when refu- when filling. the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are eling. — Keep the pump nozzle in contact heard. ¼ Do not attempt to top off the fuel with the container while you are tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts filling it. WARNING off automatically. Continued refuel- — Use only approved portable fuel ing may cause fuel overflow, result- containers for flammable liquid. ¼ Gasoline is extremely flammable and ing in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ STEERING WHEEL

¼ Never pour fuel into the throttle body the “2. Instruments and controls” to attempt to start your vehicle. section .

CAUTION

¼ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. ¼ Insert the cap straight into the fuel- filler tube, then tighten until the fuel- filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the SPA2314 fuel-filler cap properly may cause the malfunction indicator light TILT OPERATION (MIL) to illuminate. If the light illuminates because the fuel-filler Push the lock lever down and adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position. cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive Push the lock lever up securely to lock the the vehicle. The light should steering wheel in place. turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a WARNING few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your ¼ For additional information, see the vehicle and cause an accident. “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SUN VISORS MIRRORS

1. To block out glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor k1 . 2. To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing it to the side k2 . 3. To use the extension sun visor k3 (if so equipped), pull it out from the main sun visor as shown. CAUTION

Do not store the main sun visor before storing the extension sun visor. SPA1792 INSIDE MIRROR Adjust the height and the angle of the inside mirror to the desired position.

SPA2176 3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ description in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

SPA2143 SPA2157 The night position k1 will reduce glare from the AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE headlights of vehicles behind you at night. MIRROR (if so equipped) Use the day position k2 when driving in daylight The inside mirror is designed so that it automati- hours. cally changes reflection according to the inten- sity of the headlight of the following vehicle. WARNING When the inside mirror is in the “I” (AUTO) position k1 , excessive glare from the headlights Use the night position only when neces- of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. The sary, because it reduces rear view clar- AUTO indicator light kA (green) will be on. ity. When the switch of the inside mirror is in the “k” (OFF) position k2 , the inside mirror will operate normally. For HomeLink Universal Transceiver, see the Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ The outside mirror will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Turn the control knob (located on the driver side door armrest) to right or left to select the right or left outside mirror, then adjust using the knob.

SPA1390 IC0565 OUTSIDE MIRRORS Foldable outside mirrors Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the WARNING rear of the vehicle.

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MEMO

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Safety note ...... 4-2 AM radio reception ...... 4-13 Control panel buttons — with navigation system...... 4-2 Satellite (SAT) radio reception (if so equipped) ... 4-13 Names of the components ...... 4-2 Audio operation precautions ...... 4-14 How to use joystick and “ENTER” button...... 4-3 FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player ...... 4-19 How to use “BACK” button ...... 4-3 FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc (CD) Setting up the start-up screen ...... 4-3 changer ...... 4-23 How to use “INFO” button...... 4-3 CD care and cleaning ...... 4-29 How to use “SETTING” button ...... 4-5 Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so How to use “ ” button...... 4-8 equipped)...... 4-29 Ventilators ...... 4-8 Antenna ...... 4-30 Center ventilators ...... 4-8 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-31 Side ventilators ...... 4-8 Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with Heater and air conditioner (Automatic) ...... 4-9 NISSAN voice recognition (if so equipped) ...... 4-31 Automatic operation ...... 4-10 Manual operation ...... 4-10 Using the system...... 4-33 Operating tips ...... 4-11 Control buttons ...... 4-35 Servicing air conditioner ...... 4-12 Getting started ...... 4-35 Audio system ...... 4-12 List of voice commands...... 4-37 Radio ...... 4-12 Speaker adaptation (SA) mode ...... 4-42 FM radio reception ...... 4-13 Troubleshooting guide...... 4-45

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SAFETY NOTE CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM WARNING

¼ Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electric shock. ¼ Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock. ¼ In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid SAA1289 on it, or notice smoke or smell com- When you use this system, make sure the engine NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS ing from it, stop using the system is running. immediately and contact a NISSAN 1. JOYSTICK and “ENTER” button If you use the system with the engine not dealer. Ignoring such conditions may running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long 2. “INFO” button lead to accidents, fire, or electric time, it will use up all the battery power, 3. “SETTING” button shock. and the engine will not start. 4. “BACK” button Reference symbols: 5. “ ” brightness control button “ENTER” button For Navigation System control buttons (other This is a button on the control panel. than above), refer to the separate Navigation “Display” key System Owner’s Manual. This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function.

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND SETTING UP THE START-UP “ENTER” BUTTON SCREEN Choose an item on the display using the joystick When you turn the ignition key to the ACC and push the ENTER button for operation. position, the SYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on the screen. Read the warning and HOW TO USE “BACK” BUTTON select the “OK” key then push the “ENTER” This button has two functions. button. To return to the previous screen: If you do not push the ENTER button, this system will not proceed to the next step display. When this button is pushed during setup, setup will be canceled, and the screen will return to the To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate previous screen. Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

To finish the set-up: SAA1290 When this button is pushed after setup is completed, the settings will be renewed as directed, HOW TO USE “INFO” BUTTON and the screen will return to the map. When the “INFO” button is pushed, the “Main- INFO: tenance” screen will be displayed. When the “BACK” button must be pushed, (for Maintenance information example, after the setup is finished) instructions are given in the operation procedure of each To set the maintenance interval for the Engine section in this manual. If the “BACK” button is Oil or Oil Filter, choose an item using the joystick pushed when not finished with the setup, the and push the “ENTER” button. setting will be canceled, and the screen will You can also set to display a message to remind return to the previous screen. you that the maintenance needs to be performed. The following example shows how to set the engine oil change interval. Use the same steps Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ to set the other maintenance information. “Maintenance” display cannot be operated when the vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place to see the information.

SAA1291 1. Reset the driving distance to the new maintenance schedule. 2. Set the interval (mileage) of the maintenance schedule. To determine the recommended maintenance interval, refer to your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. 3. To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMA- TION automatically when the set trip distance is reached, highlight the “Interval Re- minder” key with the joystick and push the “ENTER” button. 4. To return the display to the “Maintenance” screen, push the “BACK” button.

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SAA1332 SAA1292 SAA1293 Engine Oil k1 /Oil Filter k2 Maintenance notice The “Maintenance Notice” screen displays *: Refer to the separate Navigation System each time the ignition switch is turned ON until Owner’s Manual. The “Maintenance Notice” screen (“ENGINE one of the following conditions are met: OIL” or “OIL FILTER”) will be automatically HOW TO USE “SETTING” BUTTON ¼ “Reset Distance” is selected. displayed as shown when both of the following The “Settings” screen will appear when the conditions are met: ¼ “Interval Reminder” is set OFF. “SETTING” button is pushed. ¼ the vehicle is driven the set distance and the ¼ the maintenance interval is set again. ignition switch is turned OFF. ¼ the ignition switch is turned ON the next time the vehicle will be driven. To return to the previous display after the “Maintenance Notice” screen is displayed, push the “BACK” button.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-5

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ and turn on the “ON” indicator. Brightness/Contrast: To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen, select the “Brightness”or“Contrast” key and push the “ENTER” button. Then you can adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and the contrast to lower or higher using the joystick.

SAA1540 SAA1091 Display settings Clock settings The following menu will appear when pushing The following display will appear when pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting “Display” key the “SETTING” button, selecting the “Clock” and pushing the “ENTER” button. key and pushing the “ENTER” button. Display: On-screen Clock: To turn off the screen, select the “Display” key When this item is turned to ON, a clock is always and push the “ENTER” button to turn off the displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. “ON” indicator. When any mode button is This clock will indicate the time almost exactly pushed with the screen off, the screen turns on because it is always adjusted by the GPS for further operation. The screen will turn off system. automatically 5 seconds after the operation is finished on the map display. To turn on the screen, select the “Display” key 4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Clock Format: Choose either the 12-hour clock display or the 24-hour clock display. Offset Adjust: Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per minute. Daylight Saving Time: Turn this item to ON for daylight saving time application. Time Zone: Choose the time zone from the following SAA1295 SAA1296 ¼ Pacific Display of Select Language Language/Units settings Select the “Select Language”or“Select ¼ Mountain Units” key and push the “ENTER” button. The Language/Units settings screen will appear ¼ Central when selecting the “Language/Units” key and Language: “English” or “Français” ¼ Eastern pushing the “ENTER” button. Unit: “US” — Mile, °F, MPG ¼ Atlantic “Metric” — km, °C, L/100 km ON ¼ Newfoundland Select the “ ” key of the desired language or units and push the “ENTER” button.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-7

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ VENTILATORS

HOW TO USE “ ” BUTTON Push the “ ” (DAY/NIGHT) button to switch the display brightness to the daytime or night- time mode, and adjust the brightness by moving the joystick right or left. If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the “BACK” button is pushed, the display will return to the previous display. Push the “ ” button for more than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Push the button again for more than 2 seconds to turn the display on. SAA0600 SAA0601 CENTER VENTILATORS SIDE VENTILATORS

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators. Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators by kA opening, kB closing or kC rotating as illustrated. Moving the lever up or down will open kA or close kB the vents. To change the air flow direction, turn the dial kC .

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Automatic)

the assistance of others in your vehicle. Unattended pets should also not be left alone. ¼ Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner. NOTE: SAA1297 In your vehicle, the air conditioner system 1. Air flow control dial is designed to automatically activate the WARNING cooling function when operating the air 2. Temperature control dial* flow control dial, the fan speed control dial * The display of degrees: or the air intake button. (The indicator light ¼ The air conditioner cooling function “60-75-90” is used for °F (US). on the A/C button will illuminate.) Push the “18-25-32” is used for °C (Canada). operates only when the engine is A/C button off when the cooling function is running. not necessary. 3. Fan speed control dial ¼ On hot, sunny days, temperatures in 4. Rear window defroster button a closed vehicle could quickly be- (See the “2. Instruments and controls” sec- come high enough to cause severe or tion.) possibly fatal injuries to people or 5. Air intake button animals. Do not leave children or (Air recirculation and Fresh air) adults who would normally require 6. A/C (air conditioner) button

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ AUTOMATIC OPERATION need to heat only, use this mode. windows, turn the fan speed control dial to the maximum position. Cooling and/or dehumidified heating 1. Turn the fan speed control dial and air flow ¼ (AUTO) control dial to the AUTO position. (The air As soon as possible after the windshield is conditioner will turn on.) clean, turn the air flow control dial to the AUTO position to return to the auto mode. This mode may be normally used all year round 2. Push the A/C button to turn off the air as the system automatically works to keep a conditioner. (The A/C button indicator light ¼ When the air flow control dial is turned to the constant temperature. Air flow distribution and will turn off.) or position, the air conditioner fan speed are also controlled automatically. will automatically be turned on at outside 3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the temperatures above 23°F (−5°C) to defog 1. Turn the fan speed control dial and air flow desired temperature. control dial to the AUTO position. The air the windshield, and the air recirculation mode conditioner will automatically turn on. (The ¼ The temperature of the passenger compart- will automatically be turned off. A/C button indicator light illuminates.) ment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con- Outside air is drawn into the passenger 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the trolled automatically. compartment to improve the defogging per- desired temperature. formance. ¼ Do not set the temperature lower than the ¼ Adjust the temperature to about 75°F (24°C) outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys- MANUAL OPERATION for normal operation. tem may not work properly. Fan speed control ¼ The temperature of the passenger compart- ¼ Not recommended if windows fog up. Turn the fan speed control dial to manually ment will be maintained automatically. Air control the fan speed. flow distribution and fan speed are also con- Dehumidified defrosting or defogging trolled automatically. 1. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired Turn the dial to the AUTO position to return to automatic control of the fan speed. A visible mist may be seen coming from the position. ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the DEF Air recirculation/Fresh air cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunc- position. tion. Each time the air intake button is pushed, the 3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the indicator light on the button will alternate Heating (AUTO; A/C off) desired temperature. (Air recirculation) and (Fresh air). The air conditioner does not activate. When you ¼ To quickly remove ice from the outside of the When the indicator light is on, the interior 4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ air is recirculated. (When the air recirculation To turn the system off mode is selected with the A/C indicator off while the fan speed control dial is in the AUTO Turn the fan speed control dial to the OFF position, the air conditioner will turn on.) position. When the indicator light is on, the outside OPERATING TIPS air is drawn into the passenger compartment. When the engine coolant temperature and out- ¼ When the air intake button is pushed for side air temperature are low, the air flow from the longer than 1.5 seconds, both indicator lights foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of ( and ) will flash twice, and then 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. the intake air will be controlled automatically. After the coolant temperature warms up, the air During this AUTO mode, the indicator light of flow from the foot outlets will operate normally. the currently selected mode illuminates. ¼ When the air flow control dial is in the or position, the air recirculation SAA0603 mode does not activate. Sensor kA on the instrument panel helps main- Air flow control tain a constant temperature; do not put anything on or around this sensor. Turning the air flow control dial selects the air outlet to: : Air flows from center and side ventilators. : Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. : Air flows mainly from foot outlets. : Air flows from defroster and foot outlets. : Air flows mainly from defroster outlets. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioning system in your NISSAN RADIO do not indicate any malfunction in your radio vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed system. with the environment in mind. This refrigerant Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and press the POWER, FM or AM button to turn on the Remember that a moving vehicle is not the ideal will not harm the earth’s ozone layer. How- place to listen to a radio. Because of the move- ever, special charging equipment and lubricant radio. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the key should be turned to the ACC ment, reception conditions will constantly are required when servicing your NISSAN air change. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and position. conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubri- interference from other vehicles can work cants will cause severe damage to your air Radio reception is affected by station signal against ideal reception. Described below are conditioning system. See “Capacities and rec- strength, distance from radio transmitter, build- some of the factors that can affect your radio ommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical ings, bridges, mountains and other external in- reception. and consumer information” section for air con- fluences. Intermittent changes in reception qual- Some cellular phones or other devices may ditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recom- ity normally are caused by these external cause interference or a buzzing noise to come mendations. influences. from the audio system speakers. Storing the A NISSAN dealer will be able to service your Using a cellular phone in or near the ve- device in a different location may reduce or environmentally friendly air conditioning system. hicle may influence radio reception quality. eliminate the noise. WARNING Radio reception Your radio system is equipped with state-of-the- The air conditioner system contains re- art electronic circuits to enhance radio recep- frigerant under high pressure. To avoid tion. These circuits are designed to extend re- personal injury, any air conditioner ser- ception range, and to enhance the quality of that vice should be done only by an experi- reception. enced technician with proper equip- However there are some general characteristics ment. of FM, AM and SAT (satellite — if so equipped) radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area, and

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade SATELLITE (SAT) RADIO and/or drift. RECEPTION (if so equipped) Static and flutter: During signal interference from When the satellite radio is first installed or the buildings, large hills or due to antenna position, battery has been replaced, the satellite radio usually in conjunction with increased distance may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. from the station transmitter, static or flutter can Wait more than 10 minutes with the satellite be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the radio ON for the satellite radio to receive all of treble setting to reduce treble response. the necessary data. Multipath reception: Because of the reflective No satellite radio reception is available when the characteristics of FM signals, direct and re- SAT band option is selected unless optional flected signals reach the receiver at the same satellite receiver and antenna are installed, and time. The signals may cancel each other, result- an XM® satellite radio service subscription is ing in momentary flutter or loss of sound. active. SAA0306 AM RADIO RECEPTION Satellite radio performance may be affected if FM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals, because of their low frequency, can cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal. Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30 bend around objects and skip along the ground. miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single In addition, the signals can be bounced off the If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite channel) FM having slightly more range than ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of antenna. these characteristics. AM signals are also sub- stereo FM. External influences may sometimes A buildup of ice on the satellite radio antenna interfere with FM station reception even if the FM ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver. can affect satellite radio performance. Remove station is within 25 miles (40 km). The strength the ice to restore satellite radio reception. of the FM signal is directly related to the distance Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals through freeway underpasses or in areas with Satellite radio is not available in Alaska and Hawaii. follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the many tall buildings. It can also occur for several same characteristics as light. For example they seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in will reflect off objects. areas where no obstacles exist. Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS ¼ CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, covered with fingerprints, or Compact Disc (CD) player that have pin holes may not work properly. CAUTION ¼ The following CDs may not work properly: ¼ Do not force a compact disc into the ¼ Copy control compact discs (CCCD) CD insert slot. This could damage the ¼ CD and/or CD changer/player. Recordable compact discs (CD-R) ¼ Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) ¼ Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or ¼ Do not use the following CDs as they CD changer. may cause the CD player to malfunction. ¼ 3.1 in (8 cm) discs ¼ During cold weather or rainy days, the ¼ CDs that are not round player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and ¼ CDs with a paper label dehumidify or ventilate the player com- ¼ CDs that are warped, scratched, or pletely. have abnormal edges ¼ The player may skip while driving on ¼ rough roads. This audio system can only play prere- corded CDs. CDs with MP3 or WMA ¼ The CD player sometimes cannot func- SAA0480 format cannot be written in this audio tion when the passenger compartment system. temperature is extremely high. De- ¼ Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) crease the temperature before use. round discs that have the “COMPACT ¼ If the CD cannot be played, one of the disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or following messages will be displayed. packaging. ¼ Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ CHECK DISC: normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an session, and writing more than once is called audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the file a multisession. ¼ Confirm that the CD is inserted cor- size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: rectly (the label side is facing up, ¼ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the etc.). 44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression ¼ contains information about the digital music Confirm that the CD is not bent or removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of file such as song title, artist, album title, warped and it is free of scratches. a sound signal that the human ear doesn’t encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. PUSH EJECT: hear. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Album/Artist/Track title line on the display. This is a malfunction due to excessive ¼ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a temperature inside the player. Remove compressed audio format created by Mi- * Windows and Windows Media are either the CD by pushing the EJECT button. crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA registered trademarks and trademarks of Mi- After a short time, reinsert the CD. The codec offers greater file compression than crosoft Corporation in the United States CD can be played when the temperature the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more and/or other countries. of the player returns to normal. digital audio tracks in the same amount of UNPLAYABLE: space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality. The file is unplayable in this audio sys- ¼ tem (only MP3 or WMA CD in the audio Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits system with a CD changer). per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio Compact Disc (CD) with MP3 or file is determined by the bit rate used when WMA (for the audio system with a encoding the file. 6CD changer) ¼ Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is Explanation of terms: the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conver- ¼ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures sion) per second. Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well-known compressed digital audio ¼ Multisession — Multisession is one of the file format. This format allows for near “CD methods for writing data to media. Writing quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of data once to the media is called a single Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-15

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ¼ If there is a file in the top level of the disc, “ROOT” is displayed. ¼ The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

SAA1025 Playback order: Playback order of the CD with compressed files (MP3/WMA) is as illustrated above. ¼ The names of folders not containing MP3/WMA files are not shown in the display.

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet Supported file systems * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. * Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported. Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR Supported versions*1 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

WMA Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information (Song title and Artist name) ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Displayable character codes*2 Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played. *2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-17

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc was inserted correctly. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature. If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be Cannot play played. Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications. Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc. Check if the disc is protected by copyright. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Poor sound quality Bit rate may be too low. It takes a relatively long time be- If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the fore the music starts playing. music starts playing. The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not Music cuts off or skips match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed. Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data. Move immediately to the next song When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by when playing. copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song. The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order. desired order.

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 8. RPT (Repeat) play button 9. CD EJECT button 10. TUNE/FF⋅REW button 11. ON⋅OFF/VOL (Volume) control knob 12. Audio/Clock display 13. Station and preset select button 14. AUDIO button Audio main operation For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” earlier in this section. ON⋅OFF/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then push the ON⋅OFF/VOL (Volume) control knob while the system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. When no CD is loaded, the radio will come on. While the system is on, pushing the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob turns the system off. SAA1298 Turn the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob to adjust FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT 3. DISP (Display) CHANGE button the volume. DISC (CD) PLAYER 4. SCAN tuning button AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, 5. CD play button 1. MUTE button BALANCE): 6. RADIO (FM/AM) band select button 2. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK Press the AUDIO button to change the selecting 7. MIX play button CHANGE button mode as follows. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-19

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ BASS → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE played, the display will show the CD play time. SEEK tuning: To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader and Balance, push FM-AM radio operation Push the SEEK button or to tune the AUDIO button until the desired mode from high to low or low to high frequencies and RADIO (FM/AM) band select: (BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE) ap- stops at the next broadcasting station. pears in the display. Push the TUNE Pushing the RADIO band select button will SCAN tuning: ( , ) or SEEK ( , ) button change the band as follows: to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM Use the TUNE or SEEK button also to adjust to high frequencies and stops at each broad- Fader or Balance modes. Fader adjusts the When RADIO band select button is pushed casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the but- sound level between the front and rear speakers while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the ton again during this 5 second period will stop and Balance adjusts the sound between the radio will come on at the station last played. SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to right and left speakers. The last station played will also come on when that station. After 10 seconds, the radio or CD display the power knob is turned to ON. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 reappears. Once the sound quality is set to the If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next sta- desired level, push the AUDIO button repeatedly band select button is pushed, the compact disc tion. until the radio or CD display appears. will automatically be turned off and the last radio Station memory operations: MUTE button: station played will come on. Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM Push the MUTE button to mute the audio sound. stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can be set Push the MUTE button again to release the signal is weak, the radio will automatically for the AM band. mute. change from stereo to monaural reception. 1. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK, DISP DISPLAY CHANGE: TUNE (Tuning) : SCAN or TUNE button. Push the DISP button for more than 1.5 seconds Push the TUNE button or for manual 2. Select the desired station and keep pushing to adjust the digital clock display. See “Clock” in tuning. To move quickly through the stations, any of the desired station select buttons (1 to the “2. Instruments and controls” section for the push and hold either side of the TUNE button 6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radio clock adjustment operation. down for more than 0.5 second. mutes when the select button is pushed.) When the DISP button is pushed for less than 3. The station indicator will then come on and 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is being 4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ the sound will resume. Memorizing is now system will turn on and the compact disc will (When the last program on the compact disc is complete. start to play. skipped through, the first program will be played.) When the (APS REW) button is 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. When the CD button is pushed with the com- pushed, the program being played returns to its pact disc loaded but the radio playing, the radio If the battery cable is disconnected, or if beginning. Push several times to skip back will automatically be turned off and the compact the fuse blows, the radio memory will be through programs. The compact disc will go disc will start to play. erased. In that case, reset the desired sta- back the number of times the button is pushed. tions. DISP CD PLAY TIME: SCAN tuning: Push the DISP button for less than 1.5 seconds Compact disc (CD) player operation When the SCAN tuning button is pushed while while the compact disc is being played to show the CD is being played, the beginning of all the Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position the play time on the display. and insert the compact disc into the slot with the tracks of CD will be played for 10 seconds in label side facing up. The compact disc will be FF (Fast Forward), REW sequence. (Rewind): guided automatically into the slot and start play- Pushing the button again during this 10 second ing. When the (fast forward) or (rewind) period will stop SCAN tuning. If the SCAN After loading the disc, the number of tracks on button is pushed while the compact disc is tuning button is not pushed within 10 seconds, the disc will appear on the display. being played, the compact disc will play while SCAN tuning moves to the next CD program. If the radio is already operating, it will automati- fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is MIX MIX play: cally turn off and the compact disc will play. released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed. When the MIX button is pushed while the com- If the system has been turned off while the pact disc is being played, programs will be compact disc was playing, pushing the APS (Automatic Program played at random, not following the sequence on ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob will start the com- Search) FF, APS REW/ the compact disc. The same program may be pact disc. TRACK CHANGE: repeated twice. Push the MIX button again to 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs can also When the (APS FF) button is pushed return to the normal play mode. be used without an adapter. while the compact disc is being played, the REPEAT (RPT) play: CD PLAY: program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip When the RPT button is pushed while the When the CD (CD play) button is pushed with through programs. The compact disc will ad- compact disc is being played, the play pattern the system off and the compact disc loaded, the vance the number of times the button is pushed. can be changed as follows: Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-21

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ¼ CD ERR F * — Eject the disc, and check whether it is a proper audio CD. (* shows a different number according to the au- The display shows the following symbol; (no dio condition.) mark): 1 CD RPT (Repeat) CD IN indicator: 1: 1 TR (Track) RPT CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD EJECT: CD is loaded. When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected. When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will come out and the system will turn off. If the compact disc comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. (except for 3.1 in [8 cm] diameter compact discs) If the following message appears on the display, push the EJECT button: ¼ CHECK DISC — Eject the disc, and check whether it is damaged or inserted upside-down.

4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 8. RPT (Repeat) play/CLOCK button 9. CD EJECT button 10. TUNE/FF⋅REW button 11. ON⋅OFF/VOL (Volume) control knob 12. Audio/Clock display 13. Station and preset (FM/AM/SAT*)/CD insert or CD play select button 14. AUDIO button * No satellite radio reception is available when the SAT band option is selected unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed, and an XM® satellite radio service subscription is active. It may take some time to receive the activation signal after subscribing to the XM satellite radio provider. After receiving the activation signal, an available channel list will be automatically updated in the radio. Turn the ignition switch from the LOCK to ACC position to update the channel list. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska and SAA1299 Hawaii. FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH 3. DISP (Display) CHANGE button Audio main operation 4. SCAN tuning button COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera- 5. CD PLAY button 1. CD LOAD button tion precautions” earlier in this section. 6. RADIO (FM/AM/SAT*) band select button 2. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK Head unit: 7. PTY (Program type), CAT (Category)* select CHANGE button button The auto loudness circuit enhances the low Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-23

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ frequency range automatically in both radio re- pears in the display. Push the TUNE FM-AM-SAT radio operation ception and CD playback. ( , ) or SEEK ( , ) button to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. RADIO (FM/AM/SAT) band select: This audio system has an active noise compen- Use the TUNE or SEEK button also to adjust sation feature called “Audio Pilot”. The Audio Pushing the RADIO band select button will Fader or Balance modes. Fader adjusts the change the band as follows: Pilot uses a microphone to detect external road sound level between the front and rear speakers noise and automatically adjusts the amplifier to and Balance adjusts the sound between the (Without satellite radio) compensate for any competing high, midrange, right and left speakers. or low frequency noise. AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM To change the AUDIOP (Audio Pilot) mode to ON⋅OFF/Volume control: OFF or ON, push the TUNE or SEEK button. (With satellite radio) → → → → Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the AM FM1 FM2 SAT AM push the ON⋅OFF/VOL (Volume) control knob desired level, push the AUDIO button repeatedly No satellite operation is available during scrolling while the system is off to call up the mode (radio until the radio or CD display reappears. Other- of modes, unless optional satellite receiver and or CD) which was playing immediately before wise, the radio or CD display will automatically antenna are installed, and an XM satellite radio the system was turned off. When no CD is reappear after about 10 seconds. service subscription is active. loaded, the radio will come on. While the system is on, pushing the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob CLOCK adjusting: When RADIO band select button is pushed turns the system off. Push the RPT button for more than 1.5 seconds while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station last played. Turn the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob to adjust to adjust the digital clock display. the volume. When the clock adjusting display is selected, the The last station played will also come on when ⋅ AUDIO button: time (hour or minute) will start flashing. See the ON OFF/VOL control knob is pushed to ON. “Clock” in the “2. Instruments and controls” If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO Push the AUDIO button to change the selecting section for the detailed clock adjustment opera- band select button is turned to ON, the compact mode as follows. tion. disc will automatically be turned off and the last BASS → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE → DISP DISPLAY CHANGE: radio station played will come on. AUDIOP This button will work during satellite radio (if so The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader and Balance, push equipped) and CD operation. Find the detailed stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast the AUDIO button until the desired mode function in the description of each item. signal is weak, the radio will automatically (BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE) ap- change from stereo to monaural reception. 4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ If the satellite radio signal is lost due to interfer- seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next sta- the sound will resume. Memorizing is now ence while driving, in a parking structure or tion. complete. tunnel for example, “NO SIGNAL” will be dis- DISP SAT radio display change (if so 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. played and no satellite radio station will be equipped): available. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if ¼ the fuse blows, the radio memory will be TUNE (Tuning): Pushing the DISP button will display additional information (for example: Title, Artist erased. In that case, reset the desired sta- Push the TUNE button or for manual name) about the satellite radio broadcast. tions. tuning. To move quickly through the stations, ¼ Radio data system (RDS): push and hold either side of the TUNE button Pushing the DISP button for more than 1.5 down for more than 0.5 second. seconds will change the display mode as RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a follows: data information service transmitted by some SEEK tuning: radio stations on the FM band (not AM band) Channel number → Channel name → Artist (For FM and AM radio) → → and/or SAT encoded within a regular radio name Song title Channel number broadcast. Currently, most RDS stations are in Push the SEEK button or to tune Station memory operations: large cities, but many stations are now consid- from high to low or low to high frequencies and ering broadcasting RDS data. stops at the next broadcasting station. Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and the SAT radio (6 for SAT1, RDS can display: (For satellite radio) 6 for SAT2), and 6 stations can be set for the ¼ Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”. Push the SEEK button or to seek AM band. channels of the next or previous category. ¼ Station name, such as “The Groove”. 1. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK, ¼ SCAN tuning: SCAN or TUNE button. Music or programming type such as “Classi- cal”, “Country”, or “Rock”. Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low 2. Select the desired station and keep pushing ¼ Traffic reports about delays or construction. to high frequencies and stops at each broad- any of the desired station and preset buttons casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the but- (1 to 6) until a beep sound is heard. (The If the station broadcasts RDS information, the ton again during this 5 second period will stop radio mutes when the station and preset RDS icon is displayed. SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to button is pushed.) that station. 3. The station indicator will then come on and If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-25

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Program type (PTY)/Category pushing the preset buttons for more than 1.5 3. PTY (CAT) SCAN tuning mode (CAT) select: seconds when the desired PTY (CAT) name is in the display. Push the SCAN tuning button to tune the When PTY button is pushed during FM mode, PTY (CAT) name station, and stop at each the PTY (CAT) name of the current tuned station broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing is displayed. When the PTY (CAT) button is the button again during this 5 second period pushed during satellite radio mode (if so will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will equipped), the category name of the current remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN channel is displayed. During this time if the PTY tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, data code is zero, or the data is unreadable, the SCAN tuning moves to the next station. display will show “NONE”. Compact disc (CD) changer 1. PTY (CAT) selection mode operation PTY (CAT) name selection can be done by Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position, the up/down TUNE button or in push the LOAD button and insert the compact the PTY (CAT) selection mode. disc into the slot with the label side facing up. It is possible to shift the PTY (CAT) name by The compact disc will be guided automatically one step, with one push of the up/down into the slot and start playing. TUNE button or . After loading the disc, the number of tracks on After selecting a PTY (CAT) name, push the the disc will appear on the display. 2. PTY (CAT) SEEK tuning mode SEEK button or SCAN button within 10 If the radio is already operating, it will automati- seconds. Tuning to the PTY (CAT) station will After selecting a PTY (CAT) name, push the cally turn off and the compact disc will play. start. If you do not push the TUNE button SEEK button or within 10 sec- within the 10 second period, the PTY (CAT) onds. Tuning to the PTY (CAT) station will CAUTION mode will be cancelled. start. If you do not push the SEEK button within the 10 second period, the PTY (CAT) PTY (CAT) name selection can also be Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs. achieved by pushing the preset buttons. mode will be cancelled. Initial PTY (CAT) names are stored in the If the system has been turned off while the preset buttons, but these can be changed by compact disc was playing, pushing the 4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob will start the com- 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the forwarding or rewinding. When the button is pact disc. disc information display will change. released, the compact disc will return to the normal play speed. CD LOAD: CD: APS (Automatic Program To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the Search) FF, APS REW: LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the loading slot by pushing the CD insert select When the (APS FF) button is pushed button (1 to 6), then insert the CD. CD with MP3 or WMA: while the compact disc is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in succes- from its beginning. Push several times to skip sion, push the LOAD button for more than 1.5 through programs. The compact disc will ad- seconds. vance the number of times the button is pushed. FF (Fast Forward), REW (When the last program on the compact disc is The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the (Rewind): skipped through, the first program will be display. played.) When the (APS REW) button is CD: CD PLAY: pushed, the program being played returns to its When the (fast forward) or (rewind) beginning. Push several times to skip back When the (CD play) button is pushed with button is pushed while the compact disc is through programs. The compact disc will go the system off and the compact disc loaded, the being played, the compact disc will play while back the number of times the button is pushed. system will turn on and the compact disc will fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is start to play. CD PLAY select button: released, the compact disc will return to normal When the button is pushed with the com- play speed. To change CD, push the CD play select button pact disc loaded but the tape or the radio (1 to 6). CD with MP3 or WMA: playing, the tape or radio will automatically be SCAN tuning: turned off and the compact disc will start to play. When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is DISP CD PLAY INFORMATION: When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for being played, the folders in the compact disc will less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being When the DISP button is pushed for less than change. played, the beginning of all the tracks of CDs will 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is being be played for 10 seconds in sequence. When the or button is pushed for played, the play time will be displayed. more than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for When the DISP button is pushed for more than is being played, the compact disc will play while more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-27

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ played, the first program in all the CDs will be 1 DISC MIX: 1 CD MIX ¼ CD ERR F * — Eject the disc, and check played for 10 seconds. whether it is a proper audio 1 MIX: 1 FLDR MIX CD. (* shows a different Pushing the button again during this 10 second CD EJECT: number according to the au- period will stop SCAN tuning. dio condition.) When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be CD IN indicator: 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next ejected. disc program. CD IN indicator (inserted slot number1-6) To eject the discs selected by the CD select appears on the display when the CD is loaded. REPEAT (RPT): button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5 When the RPT play button is pushed while the seconds. compact disc is played, the play pattern can be To eject all the discs in succession, push the changed. EJECT button for more than 1.5 seconds. CD: When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will come out and the system will turn off. If the compact disc comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot CD with MP3 or WMA: to protect it. If either of the following messages appear on the display, push the EJECT button: ¼ PUSH EJECT — Eject the disc, and insert it The display shows the following symbols. again. (no mark): ALL CD RPT (Repeat) ¼ CHECK DISC — Eject the disc, and check 1 DISC: 1 CD RPT whether it is damaged or inserted upside-down. 1: 1 TR (Track) RPT or 1 FLDR (Folder) RPT MIX: ALL CD MIX 4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 1. VOLUME control switch 2. MODE select switch 3. POWER on/off switch 4. Tuning switch 5. POWER on/MODE select switch STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped) The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel. POWER on/off switch (for Type A) With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or SAA0451 SAA1300 ON position, push the POWER on/off switch to Type A turn the audio system on or off. CD CARE AND CLEANING POWER on/MODE select switch ¼ Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the (for Type B) surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc. With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or ¼ Always place the discs in the storage case ON position, push the POWER on/MODE se- when they are not being used. lect switch to turn the audio system on. Push the ¼ To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the switch to change the mode in the sequence of center to the outer edge using a clean, soft AM, FM1, FM2, SAT (if so equipped) and CD. cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion. MODE select switch (for Type A) Do not use a conventional record cleaner or Push the MODE select switch to change the alcohol intended for industrial use. mode. ¼ A new disc may be rough on its inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges using SAA1698 the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated. Type B Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-29

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Without satellite radio: between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval be- AM, FM1, FM2 and CD or CD changer tween programs, the system may not stop in the With satellite radio: desired or expected location. AM, FM1, FM2, SAT and CD changer FOLDER change (CD changer/CD with MP3 or WMA): VOLUME control switches Push up or down the tuning switch for more than Push up or down the VOLUME control switch to 1.5 seconds to change the folders (if there are increase or decrease the volume. any folders). Tuning switch DISC change (CD changer/CD without MP3 or WMA): Memory change (radio): Push up or down the tuning switch for more than Push up or down the tuning switch for less than 1.5 seconds to change to the playing disc up or SAA0606 1.5 seconds to change to the next or previous down. radio preset. ANTENNA SEEK tuning (radio): The antenna is located at the rear of the vehicle. To remove the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. Push up or down the tuning switch for more than To reinstall it, screw it securely into the base. 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station. CAUTION APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW (CD or CD changer): Be sure to remove the antenna before Push up or down the tuning switch for less than entering a low-roof garage or an auto- 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the matic car wash. Otherwise the antenna present program or skip to the next program. may be damaged. Push several times to skip back or skip through programs. This system searches for the blank intervals 4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO PHONE SYSTEM WITH NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION (if so When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in equipped) your NISSAN vehicle, be sure to observe the CAUTION following cautions, otherwise the new equip- WARNING ment may adversely affect the Engine Control ¼ Keep the antenna as far away as system and other electronic parts. possible from the electronic control ¼ Use a phone after stopping your ve- WARNING modules. hicle in a safe location. If you have to ¼ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full ¼ A cellular telephone should not be (20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route attention may be given to vehicle used while driving so full attention operation. may be given to vehicle operation. the antenna wire next to any harness. ¼ Some jurisdictions prohibit the use ¼ Adjust the antenna standing-wave If you find yourself unable to devote of cellular telephones while driving. ratio as recommended by the manu- full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off ¼ facturer. If you must make a call while your the road to a safe location and stop vehicle is in motion, the hands free ¼ Connect the ground wire from the CB your vehicle before doing so. cellular phone operational mode (if radio chassis to the body. so equipped) is highly recommended. ¼ Exercise extreme caution at all times For details, consult a NISSAN dealer. so full attention may be given to CAUTION vehicle operation. To avoid draining the vehicle battery, ¼ If a conversation in a moving vehicle use a phone after starting the engine. requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-31

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. ¼ Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recommended phone list. ¼ You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions: — Your vehicle is outside of the telephone service area. SAA1699 — Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio waves; such as in 1. Volume control switch −/+ Once your cellular phone is paired to the in- a tunnel, in an underground parking ga- vehicle phone module, no other phone connect- 2. PHONE SEND button rage, near a tall building or in a mountain- ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto- ous area. 3. PHONE END button matically connected with the in-vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is turned to the — Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it 4. Indicator light ON position with the paired cellular phone from being dialed. 5. Microphone turned on and carried in the vehicle. When the radio wave condition is not ideal or Your vehicle is equipped with the Bluetooth You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. hear the other person’s voice during a call. of a Bluetooth enabled cellular phone, you can However, you can talk on only one cellular phone Do not place the cellular phone in an area set up the wireless connection between your at a time. surrounded by metal or far away from the in- cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. Before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality With Bluetooth wireless technology, you can System, refer to the following notes. degradation and wireless connection disruption. make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle. ¼ Set up the wireless connection between a While a cellular phone is connected through the 4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Bluetooth wireless connection, the battery cm) between the radiator and your body. This possible. Close the windows to eliminate power of the cellular phone may discharge Transmitter must not be co-located or operating surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration quicker than usual. in conjunction with any other antenna or trans- sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system mitter. from recognizing voice commands correctly. If the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System seems to be malfunctioning, see “Troubleshoot- USING THE SYSTEM ¼ Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a ing guide” later in this section. You can also visit command. Otherwise, the command will not be www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for troubleshoot- The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows received properly. ing help. hands-free operation of the Bluetooth Hands- Free Phone System. ¼ Start speaking a command within 5 seconds Some cellular phones or other devices may after the tone sounds. cause interference or a buzzing noise to come If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may ¼ from the audio system speakers. Storing the not be available so full attention may be given to Speak in a natural voice without pausing device in a different location may reduce or vehicle operation. between words. eliminate the noise. Initialization Giving voice commands Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone When the ignition switch is turned to the ON To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push antenna and body, etc. position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial- and release the button located on the ized, which takes a few seconds. When com- steering wheel. The light on the overhead con- This device complies with Part 15 of the pleted, the amber light on the overhead console sole flashes to signal you have entered a voice FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the illuminates and the system is ready to accept recognition (VR) session. After the tone sounds, following two conditions: (1) this device voice commands. If the button is pushed speak a command. may not cause harmful interference, and before the initialization completes, the system (2) this device must accept any interference will announce “Hands-free phone system not The command given is picked up by the micro- received, including interference that may ready” and will not react to voice commands. phone, and voice feedback is given when the cause undesired operation. command is accepted. Operating tips FCC Radiation Exposure Statement: ¼ If you need to hear the available commands To get the best performance out of the NISSAN for the current menu again, say “Help” and This equipment complies with FCC radiation Voice Recognition system, observe the follow- the system will repeat them. exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled ing: environment. This equipment should be installed ¼ If a command is not recognized, the system and operated with minimum distance 8 in (20 ¼ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as announces, “Command not recognized. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-33

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Please try again.” Repeat the command in a — “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh Example: 1-555-1212 *123 clear voice. oh” — “One five five five one two one two star ¼ If you want to go back to the previous ¼ Words can be used for the first 4 digits one two three” command, you can say “Go back” or “Cor- places only. NOTE: rection” anytime the system is waiting for a Example: 1-800-662-6200 response. For best results, say phone numbers as — “One eight hundred six six two six two oh single digits. ¼ You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” oh”, or “Quit.” The system announces “Cancel” — NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty and ends the VR session. You can also push two hundred, and the button on the steering wheel at any time. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, — NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two a double beep is played to indicate you have hundred. exited the system. ¼ Numbers can be spoken in small groups. The ¼ If you want to adjust the volume of the voice system will prompt you to continuing entering feedback, push the volume control switch (+ digits, if desired. or −) on the steering wheel while being Example: 1-800-662-6200 provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob. — “One eight oh oh” How to say numbers The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more. NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer — “six six two” to the rules and examples below. The system repeats the numbers and ¼ Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”. prompts you to enter more. Example: 1-800-662-6200 — “six two oh oh” — “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh ¼ You can say “Star” for * and “Pound” for # at oh”, or anytime in any position of the phone number. 4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MODE/PHONE END “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” later in this section. Push the button to cancel a VR session or end a call. 4. The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the GETTING STARTED language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in French). Use the following chart to select The following procedures will help you get the language. started using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For NOTE: additional command options, refer to “List of You must press the button or the voice commands” later in this section. button within 5 seconds to change Choosing a language the language. You can interact with the Bluetooth Hands- Press Press SAA1700 Free Phone System using English, Spanish or Current (TALK/PHONE (MODE/PHONE language SEND) END) French. CONTROL BUTTONS to select to select To change the language, perform the following. The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands- English Spanish French Free Phone System are located on the steering 1. Press and hold the button for more Spanish English French wheel. than 5 seconds. French English Spanish TALK/PHONE SEND 2. The system announces: “Press the PHONE Push the button to initiate a VR session SEND ( ) button for the hands-free 5. If you decide not to change the language, do or answer an incoming call. phone system to enter the speaker adapta- not press either button. After 5 seconds, the tion mode or press the PHONE END VR session will end, and the language will not You can also use the button to skip ( ) button to select a different lan- be changed. through system feedback and to enter com- guage.” mands during a call. See “List of voice commands” and “During a call” later in this sec- 3. Press the button. tion for more information. For information on speaker adaptation, see

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-35

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Pairing procedure The code is always “1234” regardless of the tion on selecting ringtones. number of phones paired. Making a call by entering a phone The pairing procedure of the cellular phone number varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/ bluetooth for instructions on pairing NISSAN recommended cellular phones. 5. The system asks you to say a name for the phone kE . 1. Push the button on steering wheel. A If the name is too long or too short, the tone will sound. system tells you, then prompts you for a name 1. Push the button on the steering wheel. again. 2. Say: “Call” kA . The system acknowledges The system announces the available com- the command and announces the next set of mands. Also, if more than one phone is paired and the name sounds too much like a name available commands. 2. Say: “Setup” kA . The system acknowledges already used, the system tells you, then 3. Say the number you wish to call kB . For the command and announces the next set of prompts you for a name again. example, 555-1212 can be said as “five five available commands. 6. The system asks you to assign a priority level five one two one two.” See “How to say 3. Say: “Pair phone” kB . The system acknowl- kF . The priority level determines which phone numbers” earlier in this section for more edges the command and announces the next is active when more than one paired information. set of available commands. Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle. Follow the 4. When you have finished speaking the phone instructions provided by the system or refer kC number, the system repeats it back and 4. Say: “New phone” . The system acknowl- to “Setup” later in this section for more edges the command and asks you to initiate announces the available commands. k information on changing priorities. pairing from the phone handset D . 5. Say: “Dial” kC . The system acknowledges the 7. The system will ask if you would like to select command and makes the call. When you are asked to enter a PIN code for a custom ring tone kG . Follow the instruc- pairing your Bluetooth cellular phone, oper- tions provided by the system or refer to For additional command options, see “List of ate it to enter the code “1234”. “Setup” later in this section for more informa- voice commands” later in this section. 4-36 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Receiving a call You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands “Call” currently available anytime the system is waiting When you hear the ring tone, press the for a response. button on the steering wheel. If you want to end an action without completing Once the call has ended, press the button it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at anytime the on the steering wheel. system is waiting for a response. The system will end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is NOTE: cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate If you do not wish to take the call when you you have exited the system. hear the ring tone, press the button If you want to go back to the previous command, on the steering wheel to reject the call. you can say “Go back” or “Correction” anytime Name (speak name) kA For additional command options, see “List of the system is waiting for a response. If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, you voice commands” later in this section. When you get used to the menus in the system, can dial a number associated with a name and LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS you can talk ahead by saying more than one location. command at a time. For example, say, “Call five five five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.” See “Phone book” later in this section to learn how to store entries. Also, when you get used to the system re- sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone by When prompted by the system, say the name of pressing the button on the steering wheel. the phone book entry you wish to call. The However, if you press the button when the system acknowledges the name. system is waiting for a response from you it will end the VR session. If there are multiple locations associated with the When you push and release the button on name, the system asks you to choose the loca- the steering wheel, you can choose from the tion. commands on the Main Menu. The following Once you have confirmed the name and loca- pages describe these commands and the com- tion, the system begins the call. mands in each sub-menu. Number (speak digits) kB Remember to wait for the tone before speaking. When prompted by the system, say the number Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-37

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers” wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter You can also issue the Transfer Call com- and “Making a call by entering a phone number” commands. mand again to return to a hands-free call earlier in this section for more details. through the vehicle. ¼ “Help” — The system announces the avail- “Redial” kC able commands. ¼ “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it. ¼ Use the Redial command to call the last number “Go back/Correction” — The system an- Use the mute command again to unmute your that was dialed within the vehicle. nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session and voice. returns to the call. NOTE: NOTE: ¼ “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces The system will not redial the last number If the other party ends the call or the “Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns to dialed by the handset keypad. cellular phone network connection is lost the call. while the Mute feature is on, the Mute The system acknowledges the command, re- ¼ “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send com- feature may need to be reset to “off.” peats the number and begins dialing. mand to enter numbers during a call. For “Phone book” If a redial number does not exist, the system example, if you were directed to dial an announces, “There is no number to redial” and extension by an automated system: ends the VR session. Say: “Send one two three four.” “Call back” kD The system acknowledges the command and Use the Call Back command to dial the number sends the tones associated with the num- of the last incoming call within the vehicle. bers. The system then ends the VR session The system acknowledges the command, re- and returns to the call. peats the number and begins dialing. If a call ¼ “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com- back number does not exist, the system an- mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each nounces, “There is no number to call back” and Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular ends the VR session. phone paired with the system. Each name can phone when privacy is desired. have up to 4 locations/phone numbers associated During a call with it. The system announces, “Transfer call. Call During a call there are several command options transferred to privacy mode.” The system available. Press the button on the steering then ends the VR session. 4-38 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ NOTE: For example, say: “five five five one two one book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phone two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in number to an existing entry. Each phone has its own separate phone this section for more information. book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone When prompted by the system, say the name of book if you are currently connected with To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular the entry you wish to edit. Phone B. phone’s memory (if so equipped): The system acknowledges the name and asks “New entry” kA Say: “Transfer entry.” you for the location you would like to edit. Use the New Entry command to store a new The system acknowledges the command and Say the name of the location. The system ac- name in the system. asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone knowledges the location. The system will ask you handset. The new contact phone number will be to say a phone number or to transfer a phone When prompted by the system, say the name transferred from the cellular phone via the number stored in the cellular phone’s memory. you would like to give the new entry. Bluetooth communication link. To enter a phone number by voice command: For example, say: “Mary.” The transfer procedure varies according to each For example, say: “five five five one two one If the name is too long or too short, the system cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in tells you, then prompts you for a name again. Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions this section for more information. Also, if the name sounds too much like a name on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular already stored, the system tells you, then recommended cellular phones. phone’s memory (if so equipped): prompts you for a name again. The system repeats the number and prompts Say: “Transfer entry.” Once the system accepts the name and you you for the next command. When you have confirm it is correct, the system asks for a finished entering numbers, choose “Store.” The system acknowledges the command and location (Home, Office, Mobile or Other). asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone The system confirms the name, location and handset. The new contact phone number will be For example, say: “Home.” number. The system then asks if you would like transferred from the cellular phone via the to store another location for the same name. If The system acknowledges the location. The Bluetooth communication link. you do not wish to store another location, the system will ask you to say a phone number or to system ends the VR session. The transfer procedure varies according to each transfer a phone number stored in the cellular cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s phone’s memory. “Edit” kB Manual for details. You can also visit To enter a phone number by voice command: Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-39

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN to delete, the system says so and ends the VR If there are no memos recorded, the system recommended cellular phones. session. announces “No messages to play.” The system ends the VR session. The system repeats the number and prompts “List names” kD you for the next command. When you have “Record” kB Use the List Names command to hear all the finished entering numbers, choose “Store.” names and locations in the phone book. The system announces “Recording” and a tone sounds signaling you to begin. The system confirms the name, location and The system recites the phone book entries but number, then announces that the entry has been does not include the actual phone numbers. Speak the information you wish to record clearly. stored. The system then ends the VR session. When the playback of the list is complete, the When you are done, press the or button on the steering wheel. “Delete” kC system returns to the main menu. A tone sounds and the system announces Use the Delete command to erase one entry You can stop the playback of the list at any time “Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end from the phone book, all entries from the phone by pressing the button on the steering wheel. The system ends the VR session. the VR session. book, the current redial number or the current call back number. “Memo pad” If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wish to record over the oldest memo. To delete entries from the phone book, say a name or “All entries” when prompted by the “Delete” kC system. The Delete command erases all memos. The The system acknowledges the command and system asks you to confirm this action before asks you to confirm the deletion. deleting all memos. To delete the current redial number or call back number, say “redial number” or “call back number” when prompted by the system. The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice memos, each up to 20 seconds long. If a redial number or a call back number exists, k the system deletes them without asking for “Play” A confirmation. The system plays back all the memos in the order of newest to oldest. The system ends the If there is no number for the entry you are trying VR session. 4-40 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ “Setup” must first delete one phone or replace an exist- phone of lesser priority when two or more ing phone. phones paired with Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System are in the vehicle at the same If you try to pair a phone that has already been time. paired to your vehicle’s system, the system announces the name the phone is already using. The system asks you to name the phone and The pairing procedure will then be cancelled. confirm the selection. When prompted by the system, choose from the Once the selection is confirmed, the selected following commands: phone remains active until the ignition switch is ¼ “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a phone” turned OFF or you select a new phone. earlier in this section. “Change priority” kD ¼ “Replace phone” — The system announces Use the Change Priority command to change the the names of the phones already paired and priority level of the active phone. Use the Setup command to change options asks which you would like to replace. The priority level determines which phone is associated with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Once you say the name of the phone you active when more than one paired Bluetooth Phone System. wish to replace, the paring procedure will phone is in the vehicle. begin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier in “Pair phone” kA this section. The system states the priority level of the active Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone to ¼ “List phones” — See the description below. phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. 4, 5). “List phones” kB When you are asked to enter a PIN code for If the new priority level is already being used for pairing your Bluetooth cellular phone, operate it Use the List Phones command to hear the another phone, the two phones will swap priority to enter the code “1234”. names of the phones currently paired. If no levels. The code is always “1234” regardless of the phones are paired, the system announces, “No For example, if the current priority levels are: number of phones paired. paired phones to list.” The system then ends the VR session. Priority Level 1 = Phone A Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair “Select phone” kC Priority Level 2 = Phone B a sixth phone, the system announces that you Priority Level 3 = Phone C Use the Select Phone command to select a Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-41

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ and you change the priority level of Phone C to phone and asks you to choose from the follow- Level 1, then: ing commands: own voice that is stored in the system. The system Priority Level 1 = Phone C ¼ is capable of storing a different speaker adapta- “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone tion model for memory A and memory B. Priority Level 2 = Phone B and asks if you would like to select that tone. If memory A is available, the system will use Priority Level 3 = Phone A If you say no, the system plays the next memory A to store the model. If memory A is in “Delete phone” kE ringtone available and continues to cycle use and memory B is available, the system will through the ringtones until you select one or use memory B to store the model. If both of the Use the Delete Phone command to delete a quit. memory locations are in use, the system will ask specific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth the user to select which memory location should ¼ “Silent” — The system asks you to confirm Hands-Free Phone System. be overwritten. your wish to disable the ringtone. The system announces the names of the phones k Training procedure already paired with the system and their priority “Bluetooth off” G level. The system then gives you the option to Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the The procedure for training a voice is as follows. delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. 1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet list again. When Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System is outdoor location. Once you chose to delete a phone or all phones, off, you will not be able to make or receive calls 2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run- using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, you will the system asks you to confirm this action. ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis- not have access to the Phone Book. NOTE: sion in Park. You can still use the Memo Pad and access When you delete a phone, the associated Setup. 3. Press and hold the button for more phone book for that phone will also be than 5 seconds. deleted. To turn on the system again, choose the Blue- tooth On command from the Setup command. 4. The system announces: “Press the PHONE “Select ringtone” kF SEND ( ) button for the hands-free SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE phone system to enter the speaker adapta- Use the Select Ringtone command to select the tion mode or press the PHONE END Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of dia- tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call ( ) button to select a different lan- lect users to train the system to improve recogni- is received. guage.” tion accuracy. By repeating a number of com- The system announces the name of the active mands, the users can create a voice model of their 5. Press the button. 4-42 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ For information on selecting a different lan- Training phrases ¼ call three one nine oh two guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier in ¼ nine seven pause pause three oh eight this section. During the SA mode, the system instructs you to say the following phrases. ¼ Cancel 6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically. If both memory locations are (The system will prompt you for each phrase.) ¼ call back number already in use, the system will prompt you to ¼ phone book new entry ¼ call star two zero nine five overwrite one. Follow the instructions provided by the system. ¼ dial three oh four two nine ¼ delete phone 7. When preparation is complete and you are ¼ delete call back number ¼ dial eight three zero five one ready to begin, press the button. ¼ setup pair phone ¼ Home 8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the ¼ memo pad play ¼ four three pause two nine pause zero instructions provided by the system. ¼ eight pause nine three two pause seven ¼ delete redial number 9. When training is finished, the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have ¼ delete all entries ¼ phone book list names been recorded. ¼ call seven two four zero nine ¼ call eight oh five four one 10.The system will ask you to say your name. ¼ phone book delete entry ¼ Correction Follow the instructions to register your name. ¼ memo pad record ¼ setup change ring tone 11.The system will announce that speaker adaptation has been completed and the system is ¼ dial star two one seven oh ¼ dial seven four oh one eight ready. ¼ Yes ¼ setup main menu The SA mode will stop if: ¼ No ¼ Delete ¼ The button is pressed for more than 5 ¼ select ring tone ¼ dial nine seven two six six seconds in SA mode. ¼ dial eight five six nine two ¼ memo pad delete ¼ The vehicle is driven during SA mode. ¼ Bluetooth on ¼ call seven six three oh one ¼ The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or LOCK position. ¼ setup change priority ¼ go back Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-43

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ¼ call five six two eight zero ¼ dial six six four three seven

4-44 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved. Symptom Solution 1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

System fails to interpret the command correctly. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by The system consistently selects the wrong entry using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section. from the phone book. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-45

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MEMO

4-46 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ...... 5-2 Cruise control operations ...... 5-18 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ...... 5-2 Break-in schedule ...... 5-19 Three-way catalyst ...... 5-3 Increasing fuel economy ...... 5-19 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ...... 5-3 Parking/parking on hills ...... 5-20 Avoiding collision and rollover ...... 5-5 Power steering ...... 5-21 Off-road recovery...... 5-6 Brake system ...... 5-22 Rapid air pressure loss...... 5-6 Braking precautions ...... 5-22 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...... 5-7 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...... 5-22 Ignition switch ...... 5-7 Traction Control System (TCS) (if so equipped) ...... 5-24 Automatic transmission ...... 5-8 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system Manual transmission ...... 5-8 (if so equipped) ...... 5-24 Key positions ...... 5-9 Cold weather driving ...... 5-26 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 5-9 Freeing a frozen door lock ...... 5-26 Before starting the engine ...... 5-10 Starting the engine ...... 5-10 Anti-freeze ...... 5-26 Driving the vehicle ...... 5-11 Battery ...... 5-26 Automatic transmission ...... 5-11 Draining of coolant water ...... 5-26 Manual transmission ...... 5-14 Tire equipment ...... 5-26 Parking brake ...... 5-16 Special winter equipment ...... 5-26 Cruise control (if so equipped) ...... 5-17 Driving on snow or ice ...... 5-26 Precautions on cruise control ...... 5-17 Engine block heater (if so equipped)...... 5-27

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING prevent children’s access to car keys. senger compartment. If you must (Roadster models) drive with the rear hatch/trunk lid ¼ Do not leave children or adults who open, follow these precautions: would normally require the support EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide) 1. Open all the windows. of others alone in your vehicle. Pets 2. Set the air recirculation mode OFF should not be left alone either. They and the fan control at the maxi- could accidentally injure themselves WARNING mum position to circulate the air. or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, Do not breathe exhaust gases; they con- ¼ If electrical wiring or other cable con- sunny days, temperatures in a closed tain colorless and odorless carbon mon- nections must pass to a trailer vehicle could quickly become high oxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. through the seal on the rear enough to cause severe or possibly It can cause unconsciousness or death. hatch/trunk lid or the body, follow fatal injuries to people or animals. ¼ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are the manufacturer’s recommendation ¼ Properly secure all cargo to help pre- entering the vehicle, drive with all to prevent carbon monoxide entry vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not windows fully open, and have the into the vehicle. place cargo higher than the seat- vehicle inspected immediately. ¼ If a special body, camper, or other backs. In a sudden stop or collision, ¼ Do not run the engine in closed equipment is added for recreational unsecured cargo could cause per- spaces such as a garage. or other usage, follow the manufac- sonal injury. (Coupe models) turer’s recommendation to prevent ¼ Do not park the vehicle with the en- ¼ Closely supervise children when they carbon monoxide entry into the ve- gine running for any extended length are around cars to prevent them from hicle. Some recreational vehicle ap- of time. playing and becoming locked in the pliances such as stoves, refrigera- trunk where they could be seriously ¼ Keep the rear hatch/trunk lid closed tors, heaters, etc. may also generate injured. Keep the car locked with the while driving, otherwise exhaust carbon monoxide. trunk closed when not in use, and gases could be drawn into the pas-

5-2 Starting and driving

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ¼ ¼ The exhaust system and body should mals or flammable materials away Avoid driving with an extremely low be inspected by a qualified mechanic from the exhaust system compo- fuel level. Running out of fuel could whenever: nents. cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst. • The vehicle is raised for service. ¼ Do not stop or park the vehicle over ¼ flammable materials such as dry Do not race the engine while warm- • You suspect that exhaust fumes grass, waste paper or rags. They may ing it up. are entering into the passenger ignite and cause a fire. ¼ Do not push or tow your vehicle to compartment. start the engine. • You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. CAUTION TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING • You have had an accident involv- ¼ SYSTEM (TPMS) ing damage to the exhaust system, Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits underbody, or rear of the vehicle. from leaded gasoline will seriously Each tire, including the spare (if provided), reduce the three-way catalyst’s abil- should be checked monthly when cold and ity to help reduce exhaust pollutants. inflated to the inflation pressure recommended THREE-WAY CATALYST ¼ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle plac- tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle The three-way catalyst is an emission control has tires of a different size than the size indicated electrical systems can cause overrich device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure gases in the converter are burned at high tem- fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, label, you should determine the proper tire infla- peratures to help reduce pollutants. causing it to overheat. Do not keep tion pressure for those tires.) driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or As an added safety feature, your vehicle has WARNING been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring other unusual operating conditions System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- are detected. Have the vehicle in- ¼ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- sure telltale when one or more of your tires is spected promptly by a NISSAN tem are very hot. Keep people, ani- significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when dealer. the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as Starting and driving 5-3

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter- perature, check the tire pressure for all four sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to con- tires. causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire tinue to function properly. For additional information, see “Low tire pres- failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the Additional information controls” section and “Tire pressure monitoring vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. ¼ The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure system (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of emergency” Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for of the spare tire. section. proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s ¼ The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). WARNING even if under-inflation has not reached the level Also, this system may not detect a sudden to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire ¼ If the light illuminates while driving, pressure telltale. while driving). avoid sudden steering maneuvers or Your vehicle has also been equipped with a ¼ The low tire pressure warning light does not abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the automatically turn off when the tire pressure pull off the road to a safe location system is not operating properly. The TPMS is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the and stop the vehicle as soon as pos- malfunction indicator is combined with the low sible. Driving with under-inflated tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to tires may permanently damage the malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi- tires and increase the likelihood of mately one minute and then remain continuously activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire tire failure. Serious vehicle damage illuminated. This sequence will continue upon pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure could occur and may lead to an acci- subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the gauge to check the tire pressure. malfunction exists. When the malfunction indica- dent and could result in serious per- ¼ Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the sonal injury. Check the tire pressure tor is illuminated, the system may not be able to heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. for all four tires. Adjust the tire pres- the outside temperature. Low outside tem- TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of sure to the recommended COLD tire perature can lower the temperature of the air reasons, including the installation of replacement pressure shown on the Tire and or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that inside the tire which can cause a lower tire Loading Information label to turn the prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire low tire pressure warning light OFF. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after pressure warning light to illuminate. If the If you have a flat tire, replace it with a replacing one or more tires or wheels on your warning light illuminates in low ambient tem- 5-4 Starting and driving

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ FCC Notice: spare tire as soon as possible. (See CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emer- approved by the party responsible for com- gency” section for changing a flat ¼ The TPMS may not function properly pliance could void the user’s authority to tire.) when the wheels are equipped with operate the equipment. ¼ When a spare tire is mounted or a tire chains or the wheels are buried in This device complies with Part 15 of the wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not snow. FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. function and the low tire pressure ¼ Do not place metalized film or any warning light will flash for approxi- metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause mately 1 minute. The light will remain windows. This may cause poor recep- on after 1 minute. Contact your harmful interference, and (2) this device tion of the signals from the tire pres- must accept any interference received, in- NISSAN dealer as soon as possible sure sensors, and the TPMS will not cluding interference that may cause undes- for tire replacement and/or system function properly. ired operation of the device. resetting. AVOIDING COLLISION AND ¼ Replacing tires with those not origi- Some devices and transmitters may temporarily ROLLOVER nally specified by NISSAN could af- interfere with the operation of the TPMS and fect the proper operation of the cause the low tire pressure warning light to TPMS. illuminate. Some examples are: WARNING ¼ ¼ Facilities or electric devices using similar Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe radio frequencies are near the vehicle. tire sealant into the tires, as this may and prudent manner may result in loss cause a malfunction of the tire pres- ¼ If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is of control or an accident. sure sensors. being used in or near the vehicle. ¼ If a computer (or similar equipment) or a Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey DC/AC converter is being used in or near the all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, vehicle. high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As Starting and driving 5-5

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ with any vehicle, a loss of control could 2. Do not apply the brakes. Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling result in a collision with other vehicles or and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover, speeds. with both hands and try to hold a straight particularly if the loss of control causes the course. Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain- vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive 4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel- the tires for wear and damage. See “WHEELS when under the influence of alcohol or drugs erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it- (including prescription or over-the-counter 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle yourself” section of this manual. drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always to follow the road while the vehicle speed is wear your seat belt as outlined in the “1. Safety If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out” reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint while driving maintain control of the vehicle by back onto the road surface until vehicle system” section and also instruct your passen- following the procedure below. Please note that speed is reduced. gers to do so. this procedure is only a general guide. The 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in steering wheel until both tires return to the the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. In a rollover crash, an collisions and rollovers. road surface. When all tires are on the road unbelted or improperly belted person is surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap- WARNING significantly more likely to be injured or propriate driving lane. killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt. ¼ If you decide that it is not safe to return the The following actions can increase the vehicle to the road surface based on chance of losing control of the vehicle if vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradu- OFF-ROAD RECOVERY there is a sudden loss of tire air pres- ally slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe While driving, the right side or left side wheels place off the road. sure. Losing control of the vehicle may may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this cause a collision and result in personal occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow- RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS injury. ing the procedure below. Please note that this Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can ¼ procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle The vehicle generally moves or pulls occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due must be driven as appropriate based on the in the direction of the flat tire. to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. loss can also be caused by driving on under- ¼ Do not rapidly apply the brakes. 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. inflated tires. 5-6 Starting and driving

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ IGNITION SWITCH

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND ¼ Do not rapidly release the accelerator DRIVING WARNING pedal. ¼ Do not rapidly turn the steering WARNING Never remove or turn the key to the wheel. LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the Never drive under the influence of alco- driver to lose control of the vehicle and hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. could result in serious vehicle damage reduces coordination, delays reaction 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel or personal injury. time and impairs judgement. Driving af- with both hands and try to hold a straight course. ter drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident 3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel- injuring yourself and others. Addition- erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. ally, if you are injured in an accident, 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location alcohol can increase the severity of the off the road and away from traffic if possible. injury. 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle. NISSAN is committed to safe driving. You must not drive under the influence of alcohol. Every 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and year thousands of people are injured or killed in either contact a roadside emergency service alcohol related accidents. Although the local to change the tire or see “CHANGING A laws vary on what is considered to be legally FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency” intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all section of this Owner’s Manual. people differently and most people underesti- mate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over the counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition. Starting and driving 5-7

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) position. 2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON direction. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position. 4. Remove the key. If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the selector lever cannot be moved from P (Park) position. The selector lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. There is an OFF position k1 in between the SSD0392 SSD0503 LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder. When the MANUAL TRANSMISSION ignition switch is in the OFF position, the steer- The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot ing wheel is not locked. The ignition switch includes a device that helps be turned to the LOCK position and removed prevent accidental removal of the key while In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclock- driving. position. wise from the straight up position. The key can only be removed when the ignition When removing the key from the ignition switch, To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to switch is in the LOCK position. make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park) the LOCK position. Remove the key. To To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position position. unlock the steering wheel, insert the key from the ACC or ON position, turn the key to the If the selector lever is not returned to the P (Park) and turn it gently while rotating the steer- OFF position, push the key in, then turn the key position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCK ing wheel slightly right and left. to the LOCK position. position. There is an OFF position k1 in between the When the key cannot be turned to the LOCK LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is position, proceed as follows to remove the key: indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder. 5-8 Starting and driving

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it ON (Normal operating position) (3) If this procedure allows the engine to start, must be turned about 1/6 of a turn clockwise NISSAN recommends placing the registered key from the straight up position. This position turns on the ignition system and the on a separate key ring to avoid interference from electrical accessories. other devices. To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To START (4) unlock the steering wheel, insert the key This position activates the starter motor, starting and turn it gently while rotating the steer- the engine. ing wheel slightly right and left. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER KEY POSITIONS SYSTEM The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the LOCK (Normal parking position) (0) registered key. The ignition key can only be removed when the If the engine fails to start using a registered key switch is in this position. (for example, when interference is caused by OFF (1) another registered key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key The engine can be turned off without locking the ring), restart the engine using the following steering wheel. procedures: The ignition lock is designed so that the key 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the for approximately 5 seconds. selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK ACC (Accessories) (2) position and wait approximately 10 seconds. This position activates electrical accessories 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. such as the radio when the engine is not running. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key. Starting and driving 5-9

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

¼ Make sure the area around the vehicle is 1. Apply the parking brake. way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine clear. for 5 to 6 seconds. After cranking the engine, Automatic transmission: 2. release the accelerator pedal. Crank the en- ¼ Maintenance items should be checked peri- gine with your foot off the accelerator odically, for example, each time you check Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N pedal by turning the ignition key to START. engine oil. (Neutral). (P preferred.) Release the key when the engine starts. If the ¼ Check that all windows and lights are clean. The starter is designed not to operate if the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the selector lever is in one of the driving posi- ¼ above procedure. Visually inspect tires for their appearance and tions. condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. Manual transmission: CAUTION ¼ Lock all doors. Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position, and depress the clutch pedal to the floor Do not operate the starter for more than ¼ Position seat and adjust head restraints. while cranking the engine. 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does ¼ Adjust inside and outside mirrors. not start, turn the key off and wait 10 The starter is designed not to operate unless seconds before cranking again, other- ¼ Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to the clutch pedal is fully depressed. wise the starter could be damaged. do likewise. 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the ¼ Check the operation of warning lights when accelerator pedal by turning the ignition 4. Warm-up the ignition key is turned to the ON position. key to START. Release the key when the See “Warning/indicator lights and audible engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 reminders” in the “2. Instruments and con- run, repeat the above procedure. seconds after starting. Do not race the en- trols” section. gine while warming it up. Drive at moderate ¼ If the engine is very hard to start in extremely speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather or when restarting, depress the cold weather. accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it then crank the engine. In cold weather, keep the engine running for Release the key and the accelerator pedal a minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before shutting when the engine starts. it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle ¼ If the engine is very hard to start because it is more difficult to start. flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the 5-10 Starting and driving

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ DRIVING THE VEHICLE

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and push the selector lever button to shift into a Never shift to P (Park) or D (Drive) 5-speed automatic transmission driving gear. while vehicle is moving backward. These could cause an accident. The automatic transmission in your vehicle is 2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, electronically controlled by a transmission con- then gradually start the vehicle in motion. trol module to produce maximum power and smooth operation. WARNING CAUTION Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this transmis- When stopping the vehicle on an uphill ¼ Do not depress the accelerator pedal sion. Follow these procedures for maximum ve- grade, do not hold the vehicle by de- while shifting from P (Park) or N hicle performance and driving enjoyment. pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or brake should be used for this purpose. Starting the vehicle manual shift mode. Always depress After starting the engine, fully depress the foot the brake pedal until shifting is com- brake pedal and push the selector lever button pleted. Failure to do so could cause before shifting the selector lever to the R (Re- you to lose control and have an acci- verse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or Manual shift dent. mode position. Be sure the vehicle is fully ¼ stopped before shifting the selector lever. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward This automatic transmission model is de- or reverse gear before the engine has signed so that the foot brake pedal must warmed up. be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition ¼ On slippery roads, do not downshift. switch is ON. This may cause a loss of control. The selector lever cannot be moved out of ¼ Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) P (Park) position and into any of the other while the vehicle is moving forward. gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch. Starting and driving 5-11

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake WARNING pedal must be depressed and the selector lever button pushed in to move the selector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive Apply the parking brake if the selector position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. lever is in any position while the engine When parking on a hill, first depress the foot is not running. Failure to do so could brake pedal, apply the parking brake, then shift cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly into the P (Park) position. or roll away and result in serious per- R (Reverse): sonal injury or property damage. Use this position to back up. Always be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting R If the key is turned to OFF or ACC for any reason (Reverse). The brake pedal must be de- while the vehicle is in R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or pressed and the selector lever button SSD0346 any D (Drive) position, the key cannot be turned pushed in to move the selector lever from to LOCK and be removed from the ignition P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position To move the selector lever, switch. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) to R (Reverse). position, then the key can be turned to LOCK. : Push the button while depressing the N (Neutral): brake pedal, : Push the button, CAUTION Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. : Just move the selector lever. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled Shifting To prevent automatic transmission engine while the vehicle is moving. damage, use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) After starting the engine, fully depress the brake position only when the vehicle is com- D (Drive): pedal and shift the selector lever from P (Park) to pletely stopped. Use this position for all normal forward driving. R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive), or Manual shift mode position. Manual shift mode P (Park): Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R When the selector lever is shifted from D to the (Reverse). All other positions can be selected Use this selector position when the vehicle is manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or without pushing the button. parked or when starting the engine. Make sure while driving, the transmission enters the manual 5-12 Starting and driving

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ shift mode. Shift range can be selected manu- ¼ When shifting up, move the selector lever to transmission down into the lower gear, depend- ally. the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.) ing on the vehicle speed. In the manual shift mode, the shift range is ¼ When shifting down, move the selector lever Fail-safe displayed on the position indicator in the meter. to the − (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.) When fail-safe operation occurs, the automatic Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: ¼ Moving the selector lever to the same side transmission will be locked in 4th gear. → → → → twice will shift the ranges in succession. M 1 ← M 2 ← M 3 ← M 4 ← M 5 If the vehicle is driven under extreme con- However, if this motion is rapidly done, the ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning M 5 (5th): second shifting may not be completed prop- and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe erly. Use this position for all normal forward driving at system may be activated. This will occur ¼ even if all electrical circuits are functioning highway speeds. In the manual shift mode, the transmission automatically shifts down to 1st properly. In this case, turn the ignition key M 4 (4th): gear before the vehicle comes to a stop. OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the When accelerating again, it is necessary key back to the ON position. The vehicle Use this position when driving up long slopes, or to shift up to the desired range. should return to its normal operating con- for engine braking when driving down long dition. If it does not return to its normal ¼ slopes. When canceling the manual shift mode, re- operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer turn the selector lever to the D position. The 3 (3rd) and 2 (2nd): check the transmission and repair if neces- M M transmission returns to the normal driving sary. Use for hill climbing or engine braking on down- mode. hill grades. ¼ In the manual shift mode, the transmis- 1 (1st): sion may not shift to the selected gear. M This helps maintain driving performance Use this position when climbing steep hills and reduces the chance of vehicle dam- slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, age or loss of control. sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. Accelerator downshift — In D position — ¼ Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than M 4 For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the range. This reduces fuel economy. accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the Starting and driving 5-13

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according to the vehicle speed. To back up, depress the shift lever and then move it to the R (Reverse) position after stopping the vehicle completely. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear), shift to N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal. Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R or 1. WARNING

SSD0347 SSD0536 ¼ Do not downshift abruptly on slip- Shift lock release MANUAL TRANSMISSION pery roads. This may cause a loss of control. If the battery charge is low or discharged, the Shifting ¼ select lever may not be moved from the P (Park) Do not over-rev the engine when position even with the brake pedal depressed. To change gears, or when upshifting or downshifting to a lower gear. This may shifting, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into cause a loss of control or engine To move the selector lever, depress the brake the appropriate gear then slowly and smoothly pedal, apply the parking brake, and push the damage. release the clutch. shift lock release button by using a suitable tool as shown. Push the selector lever button, then This vehicle is equipped with a short throw the selector lever can be moved to N (Neutral). shifter manual transmission. To ensure smooth CAUTION This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal is discharged. before operating the shift lever. If the clutch ¼ Do not rest your foot on the clutch If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have pedal is not fully depressed before the transmis- pedal while driving. This may damage a NISSAN dealer check the automatic transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. the clutch. sion system as soon as possible. Transmission damage could occur. 5-14 Starting and driving

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ computer display. See “Trip computer” in the “2. ¼ Fully depress the clutch pedal before Instruments and controls” section for the display shifting to help prevent transmission setting information. damage. Use the up-shift indicator when driving as fol- ¼ Stop your vehicle completely before lows: shifting into R (Reverse). ¼ If the maximum engine speed is desired, set ¼ When the vehicle is stopped with the the figure at 7,500 rpm. (The indicator starts flashing from about 7,000 rpm and comes on engine running (for example, at a steady at 7,500 rpm.) stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot ¼ If the maximum engine torque is desired, set brake applied. the figure at 4,800 rpm. (The indicator starts flashing from about 4,300 rpm and comes on steady at 4,800 rpm.) SSD0638 ¼ If you want to break in your vehicle, use of the Up-shift indicator up-shift indicator with a rather low figure will help you to avoid the high engine speed. The manual transmission up-shift indicator is located in the tachometer and shows the driver To make the up-shift indicator not come on, set the timing to shift into a higher gear by illuminat- the figure at above 8,100 rpm. ing. The use of the up-shift indicator will help you There may be a slight difference between to upshift at a constant engine speed (rpm) from the timing of the up-shift indicator illumi- any gear. nation and the tachometer indication. The up-shift indicator will start flashing when the engine speed is within about 500 rpm of the set figure while driving, and then illuminate after the engine speed reaches the set figure. The engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm) for upshifting can be set on the trip Starting and driving 5-15

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ PARKING BRAKE

Suggested up-shift speeds Suggested maximum speed in each Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for gear shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Actual up-shift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driv- Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed ing habits. (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. For normal acceleration in low altitude areas Always observe posted speed limits, and drive [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]: according to the road conditions, which will Gear change MPH (km/h) ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may 1st to 2nd 8 (13) cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. 2nd to 3rd 16 (26) Gear MPH (km/h) 3rd to 4th 25 (40) SPA2110 1st 40 (65) 4th to 5th 28 (45) To apply: k1 2nd 66 (106) pull the parking brake lever up . 5th to 6th 33 (53) 3rd 95 (152) To release: For quick acceleration in low altitude areas or in 4th — 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]: 5th — 2. Automatic transmission models: Gear change MPH (km/h) 6th — 1st to 2nd 15 (24) Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. 2nd to 3rd 25 (40) 3rd to 4th 40 (64) Manual transmission models: 4th to 5th 45 (72) Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi- 5th to 6th 50 (80) tion. 3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever slightly, push the button k2 and lower the lever completely k3 . 5-16 Starting and driving

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped) 4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out. WARNING cause engine damage.

WARNING Do not use the cruise control when driv- PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE ing under the following conditions: CONTROL ¼ Be sure the parking brake is fully ¼ When it is not possible to keep the ¼ released before driving. Failure to do If the cruise control system malfunctions, it vehicle at a set speed. so can cause brake failure and lead cancels automatically. The SET indicator light ¼ on the meter panel then blinks to warn the to an accident. In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. driver. ¼ Do not release the parking brake ¼ On winding or hilly roads. ¼ If the engine coolant temperature becomes from outside the vehicle. ¼ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, excessively high, the cruise control system will be canceled automatically. ¼ Do not use the gear shift in place of etc.). ¼ the parking brake. When parking, be ¼ In very windy areas. If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the sure the parking brake is fully en- cruise control MAIN (ON⋅OFF) switch off and gaged. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle have the system checked by a NISSAN control and result in an accident. dealer. ¼ Do not leave children unattended in a ¼ vehicle. They could release the park- The SET indicator light may blink when the ing brake and cause an accident. cruise control MAIN switch is turned on while CAUTION pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise control system, perform the preceding steps On manual transmission models, do not in the order indicated. shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is set. Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal and turn the main switch off immediately. Failure to do so may

Starting and driving 5-17

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET set speed. switch and release it. (The SET indicator light ¼ will come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator If you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans- pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed. mission) or move the selector lever to N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission), ¼ To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- the cruise control will be canceled. celerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one speed. of the following three methods: ¼ The vehicle may not maintain the set speed a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When the when going up or down steep hills. If this vehicle attains the desired speed, push and happens, drive without the cruise control. release the COAST/SET switch. b) Push and hold the ACCEL/RES set switch. SSD0528 To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods: When the vehicle attains the speed you 1. ACCEL or RESUME switch desire, release the switch. a) Push the CANCEL switch; The SET indicator 2. COAST or SET switch light will go out. c) Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES set switch. Each time you do this, the set 3. CANCEL switch b) Tap the brake pedal; The SET indicator light speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 4. MAIN (ON⋅OFF) switch will go out. km/h). CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS c) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the CRUISE To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one indicator and SET indicator lights will go out. of the following three methods: The cruise control allows driving at a speed ¼ If you depress the brake pedal while pushing between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle the ACCEL/RES set switch and reset at the without keeping your foot on the accelerator attains the desired speed, push the pedal. cruising speed, turn the MAIN switch off COAST/SET switch and release it. once and then turn it on again. b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re- To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN ¼ switch on. The CRUISE indicator light on the The cruise control will automatically be can- lease the switch when the vehicle slows meter panel will come on. celled if the vehicle slows down more than down to the desired speed. 5-18 Starting and driving

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/ ¼ Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain SET switch. Each time you do this, the set CAUTION cruising speeds with a constant accelerator speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 position. km/h). During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), ¼ Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. To resume the preset speed, push and re- follow these recommendations to ob- Driving at high speed will lower fuel economy. lease the ACCEL/RES set switch. The vehicle tain maximum engine performance and ¼ Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. will resume the last set cruising speed when the ensure the future reliability and vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). Maintain a safe distance behind other ve- economy of your new vehicle. Failure to hicles. follow these recommendations may re- ¼ sult in shortened engine life and re- Use a proper gear range which suits road duced engine performance. conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible. ¼ Avoid unnecessary engine idling. ¼ Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the ¼ Keep your engine tuned up. engine over 4,000 rpm. ¼ Follow the recommended periodic mainte- ¼ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. nance schedule. ¼ Avoid quick starts. ¼ Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure will increase tire wear ¼ Avoid hard braking as much as possible. and lower fuel economy. ¼ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles ¼ Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. (800 km). Improper alignment will increase tire wear and lower fuel economy. ¼ Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary. ¼ When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and Starting and driving 5-19

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

leave the windows closed to reduce drag. ¼ Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section.

MSD0002 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. WARNING 2. Automatic transmission models:

¼ Do not stop or park the vehicle over Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may Manual transmission models: ignite and cause a fire. Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi- ¼ Never leave the engine running while tion. When parking on an uphill grade, place the vehicle is unattended. the shift lever in the 1 (Low gear) position. ¼ Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle.

5-20 Starting and driving

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ POWER STEERING

¼ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: k2 WARNING Turn the wheels away from the curb and WARNING move the vehicle back until the curb side ¼ Safe parking procedures require that wheel gently touches the curb. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for both the parking brake be set and the ¼ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO transmission placed into P (Park) for CURB: k3 the steering will not work. Steering will automatic transmission models or in be harder to operate. an appropriate gear for manual Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center transmission models. Failure to do of the road if it moves. The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic so could cause the vehicle to move pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. unexpectedly or roll away and result 4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position in an accident. and remove the key. If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much ¼ Make sure the automatic transmis- greater steering effort is needed, especially in sion selector lever has been pushed sharp turns or at low speeds. as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the button at the end of the lever.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated. ¼ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: k1 Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

Starting and driving 5-21

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ BRAKE SYSTEM

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened WARNING or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or The brake system has two separate hydraulic drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still best braking performance. have braking at two wheels. ¼ While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerat- This procedure is described in the vehicle ser- Vacuum assisted brakes ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking vice manual and can be performed by a NISSAN The brake booster aids braking by using engine or accelerating could cause the dealer. vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the wheels to skid and result in an acci- vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, dent. ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be (ABS) ¼ required to stop the vehicle and the stopping If the engine is not running or is distance will be longer. turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. WARNING Using the brakes Braking will be harder. ¼ The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This overheats the brakes, increases is a sophisticated device, but it can- wear on the brakes and pads, and reduces gas Wet brakes not prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving tech- mileage. When the vehicle is washed or driven through niques. It can help maintain vehicle To help save the brakes and to prevent the water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your control during braking on slippery brakes from overheating, reduce speed and braking distance will be longer and the vehicle downshift to a lower gear before going down a may pull to one side during braking. surfaces. Remember that stopping slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may distances on slippery surfaces will be To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed longer than on normal surfaces even reduce braking performance and could result in while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat-up with ABS. Stopping distances may loss of vehicle control. the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds also be longer on rough, gravel or until the brakes function correctly. snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a Parking brake break-in safe distance from the vehicle in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the 5-22 Starting and driving

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ helps the driver maintain steering control and ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The front of you. Ultimately, the driver is helps to minimize swerving and spinning on brake system then operates normally, but with- responsible for safety. slippery surfaces. out anti-lock assistance. ¼ Tire type and condition may also af- Using the system If the ABS warning light illuminates during the fect braking effectiveness. self-test or while driving, have the vehicle Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. checked by a NISSAN dealer. — When replacing tires, install the Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pres- specified size of tires on all four sure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will Normal operation wheels. operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles. — When installing a spare tire, make (5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions. sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading WARNING When the ABS senses that one or more wheels Information label. See “Tire and are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly Loading Information label” in the “9. Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This Technical and consumer informa- may result in increased stopping dis- action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake tion” section of this manual. tances. pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or — For detailed information, see feel a vibration from the actuator when it is “Wheels and tires” in the “8. Mainte- Self-test feature operating. This is normal and indicates that the nance and do-it-yourself” section of ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsa- this manual. The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric tion may indicate that road conditions are haz- pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The ardous and extra care is required while driving. computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls tests the system each time you start the engine the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may The system detects the rotation speed at each hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc- preventing each wheel from locking, the system tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the Starting and driving 5-23

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (TCS) (if so equipped) (VDC) SYSTEM (if so equipped) On slippery surfaces such as wet asphalt roads, When accelerating or driving on slippery sur- vehicle wheels may spin when the vehicle is WARNING faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the accelerated. This wheel spin reduces accelera- Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors tion, or causes the vehicle to swerve, thus The traction control system is designed detect these movements and control the braking decreasing vehicle stability. to prevent the wheels from spinning. and engine output to help improve vehicle stability. When the vehicle drive wheels begin to spin, the However, it does not prevent vehicle Traction Control System (TCS) controls the slipping or spinning due to abrupt steer- ¼ When the VDC system is operating, the engine torque using an electronic control sys- ing operation at high speeds or by care- “SLIP” indicator in the instrument panel tem, and it also controls automatic control shift- less or dangerous driving techniques. blinks. ing if necessary (for automatic transmission Be especially careful when driving on ¼ If the “SLIP” indicator blinks, the road condi- models). This reduces spinning of the drive slippery surfaces and always drive tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your wheels, and result in improved vehicle accelera- safely. speed and driving to these conditions. Be tion performance. It also improves the vehicle sure to drive carefully. See “Slip indicator stability by swerving motion. light”, and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) ¼ When the TCS is operating, the “SLIP” indi- OFF indicator light” in the “2. Instruments and cator light in the meter panel blinks. controls” section. ¼ If the “SLIP” indicator light blinks, the vehicle ¼ Indicator light is under slippery conditions. Be sure to drive If a malfunction occurs in the system, the carefully. See “Slip indicator light” and “Trac- “SLIP” and “VDC OFF” indicator lights illumi- tion Control System (TCS) off indicator light” nate in the instrument panel. As long as these in the “2. Instruments and controls” section. indicators are illuminated, the VDC system function is canceled. ¼ Indicator light If a malfunction occurs in the TCS, the “SLIP” The VDC system uses an Active Brake Limited and “TCS OFF” indicator lights come on in Slip (ABLS) system to improve vehicle traction. the instrument panel. As long as these indi- The ABLS system works when one of the driving cator lights are illuminated, the traction con- wheels is spinning on a slippery surface. The trol function (except the ABS) is canceled. ABLS system brakes the spinning wheel, which The vehicle will behaves like a model without distributes the driving power to the other driving the TCS. wheel. If the vehicle is operated with the VDC 5-24 Starting and driving

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ system turned off, all VDC system functions will be turned off. The ABLS system and ABS will techniques. Reduce vehicle speed both indicator lights may illuminate. and be especially careful when driv- still operate with the VDC system off. When the ¼ When driving on extremely inclined ing and cornering on slippery sur- ABLS system is activated, the “SLIP” indicator surfaces such as higher banked cor- light will blink and you may hear a clunk noise faces and always drive carefully. ners, the VDC system may not oper- and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is ¼ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen- ate properly and the “VDC OFF” indi- normal and is not an indication of a malfunction. sion. If suspension parts such as cator or “SLIP” indicator or both While the VDC system is operating, you may feel shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- indicator lights may illuminate. Do a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or bilizer bars and bushings and wheels not drive on these types of roads. feel a vibration from under the hood. This is are not NISSAN-approved or are ex- ¼ When driving on an unstable surface normal and indicates that the VDC system is tremely deteriorated the VDC system such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or working properly. may not operate properly. This could ramp, the “VDC OFF” indicator or adversely affect vehicle handling per- The VDC system computer has a built-in diag- “SLIP” indicator or both indicator formance, and the “VDC OFF” indica- nostic feature that tests the system each time lights may illuminate. This is not a you start the engine and move the vehicle at a tor or “SLIP” indicator or both indica- malfunction. Restart the engine after low speed forward or backward. When the tor lights may illuminate. driving onto a stable surface. self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise ¼ If brake related parts such as brake and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is ¼ If wheels or tires other than those pads, rotors and calipers are not normal and is not an indication of a malfunction. recommended are used, the VDC sys- standard equipment or are extremely tem may not operate properly and the deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” indica- “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indi- WARNING tor or “SLIP” indicator or both indica- cator or both indicator lights may tor lights may illuminate. ¼ The VDC system is designed to help illuminate. ¼ If engine related parts such as a muf- improve driving stability but does not ¼ The VDC system is not a substitute fler are not standard equipment or prevent accidents due to abrupt for winter tires or tire chains on a are extremely deteriorated, the “VDC steering operation at high speeds or snow-covered road. due to careless or dangerous driving OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or

Starting and driving 5-25

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ COLD WEATHER DRIVING

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK TIRE EQUIPMENT SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply 1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to It is recommended that the following items be deicer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If the provide superior performance on dry pave- carried in the vehicle during winter: lock becomes frozen, heat the key before insert- ment. However, the performance of these ¼ ing it into the key hole. tires will be substantially reduced in snowy a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle ice and snow from the windows and wiper ANTI-FREEZE on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends blades. In the winter when it is anticipated that the the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON ¼ a sturdy, flat board to be placed under the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check tires on all four wheels. Consult a NISSAN jack to give it firm support. anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection. dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and ¼ For additional information, see “Engine Cooling availability information. a shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-drifts. System” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it- 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded ¼ extra window washer fluid to refill the reser- yourself” section. tires may be used. However, some provinces voir tank. BATTERY and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE If the battery is not fully charged during extremely studded tires. cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may Skid and traction capabilities of stud- WARNING freeze and damage the battery. To maintain ded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, maximum efficiency, the battery should be may be poorer than that of non-studded ¼ checked regularly. For additional information, Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), snow tires. see “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it- very cold snow or ice can be slick and yourself” section. 3. Tire chains may be used. For details, see very hard to drive on. The vehicle will “Tire chains” in the “8. Maintenance and have much less traction or “grip” un- DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER do-it-yourself” section of this manual. der these conditions. Try to avoid If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti- driving on wet ice until the road is freeze, drain the cooling system by opening the salted or sanded. drain plug located under the radiator. Refill ¼ before operating the vehicle. See “Engine cool- Whatever the condition, drive with ing system” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it- caution. Accelerate and slow down yourself” section for changing engine coolant. 5-26 Starting and driving

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so with care. If accelerating or down- equipped) WARNING shifting too fast, the drive wheels will Engine block heaters are available through lose even more traction. ¼ Do not use your engine block heater NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature ¼ Allow more stopping distance under starting. The engine block heater should be used with an ungrounded electrical system these conditions. Braking should be when the outside temperature is 20°F (−7°C) or or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be started sooner than on dry pavement. lower. seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded con- ¼ To use the engine block heater: Allow greater following distances on nection. slippery roads. 1. Turn the engine off. ¼ Disconnect and properly store the ¼ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block engine block heater cord before These may appear on an otherwise heater cord. starting the engine. Damage to the clear road in shaded areas. If a patch 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a cord could result in an electrical of ice is seen ahead, brake before grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord. shock and can cause serious injury. reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steer- 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault ¼ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ing maneuvers. Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt extension cord rated for at least 10 A. AC (VAC) outlet. Plug the extension cord into a ¼ Do not use cruise control on slippery 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro- roads. for at least2-4hours, depending on outside tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. ¼ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust temperatures, to properly warm the engine Failure to use the proper extension gases under your vehicle. Keep snow coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the cord or a grounded outlet can result clear of the exhaust pipe and from engine block heater on. in a fire or electrical shock and cause around your vehicle. 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop- serious personal injury. erly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.

Starting and driving 5-27

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MEMO

5-28 Starting and driving

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 6 In case of emergency

Flat tire ...... 6-2 If your vehicle overheats ...... 6-9 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ...... 6-2 Towing your vehicle ...... 6-10 Changing a flat tire ...... 6-2 Towing recommended by NISSAN ...... 6-11 Jump starting ...... 6-7 Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ...... 6-12 Push starting ...... 6-9

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING ¼ SYSTEM (TPMS) tires and increase the likelihood of Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire failure. Serious vehicle damage tire sealant into the tires, as this may This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure could occur and may lead to an acci- cause a malfunction of the tire pres- Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres- dent and could result in serious per- sure sensors. sure of all tires except the spare. When the low sonal injury. Check the tire pressure tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of for all four tires. Adjust the tire pres- your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the sure to the recommended COLD tire CHANGING A FLAT TIRE vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the pressure shown on the Tire and If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low Loading Information label to turn the below. tire pressure warning light (in the meter panel). low tire pressure warning light OFF. Stopping the vehicle This system will activate only when the vehicle is If you have a flat tire, replace it with a driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For spare tire as soon as possible. 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away more details, refer to “Warning/indicator lights from traffic. and audible reminders” in the “2. Instruments ¼ When a spare tire is mounted or a 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. and controls” section and “Tire pressure moni- wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking toring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and function and the low tire pressure brake. Shift the manual transmission into R driving” section. warning light will flash for approxi- (Reverse) position (automatic transmission in mately 1 minute. The light will remain P (Park) position). WARNING on after 1 minute. Contact your 4. Turn off the engine. NISSAN dealer as soon as possible 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to ¼ If the light illuminates while driving, for tire replacement and/or system signal professional road assistance person- avoid sudden steering maneuvers or resetting. nel that you need assistance. abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, ¼ Replacing tires with those not origi- 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle pull off the road to a safe location and stand in a safe place, away from traffic nally specified by NISSAN could af- and clear of the vehicle. and stop the vehicle as soon as pos- fect the proper operation of the sible. Driving with under-inflated TPMS. tires may permanently damage the

6-2 In case of emergency

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ WARNING

¼ Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park). ¼ Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. ¼ Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro- MCE0001A SCE0409 Coupe models fessional road assistance. Blocking wheels Getting the spare tire and tools Place suitable blocks k1 at both the front and Remove jacking tools and spare tire from the back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire storage area located in the luggage/trunk as to prevent the vehicle from moving when it illustrated. is jacked up. Coupe models: WARNING 1. Spare tire — Turn the retainer counterclockwise to remove. Be sure to block the wheel as the ve- 2. Jack — Turn it counterclockwise to remove. hicle may move and result in personal 3. Jacking tools injury.

In case of emergency 6-3

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Jacking up the vehicle and removing the damaged tire the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip dif- ferentials. WARNING ¼ Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack. ¼ Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, Carefully read the caution label attached to support it with safety stands. the jack body and the following instructions. ¼ Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle SCE0491 Roadster models on other vehicles. The jack is de- Roadster models: signed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change. 1. Spare tire — Turn the retainer counterclockwise to remove. ¼ Use the correct jack up points. Never 2. Jack — Unfasten the belt and lift the jack up use any other part of the vehicle for to remove. jack support. 3. Jacking tools — They are in the tool bag. ¼ Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. ¼ Never use blocks on or under the jack. ¼ Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause

6-4 In case of emergency

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SCE0410A CE1092-A Jack-up point 1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point The jack should be used on level firm as illustrated above so that top of the jack ground. contacts the vehicle at the jack up point. 2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by Align the jack head between the two notches turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts groove of the jack head between the notches until the tire is off the ground. as shown. 3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands as shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

In case of emergency 6-5

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence Wheel nut tightening torque: illustrated (k1 - k5 ) until they are tight. 80 ft-lb (108 N⋅m) 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to tighten the wheel nuts securely in the se- specification at all times. It is recom- quence as illustrated. Lower the vehicle com- mended that wheel nuts be tightened to pletely. specification at each lubrication interval. Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. WARNING COLD pressure:

¼ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly After vehicle has been parked for three tightened wheel nuts can cause the hours or more or driven less than 1 mile wheel to become loose or come off. (1.6 km). SCE0039 This could cause an accident. COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to Installing the spare tire ¼ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel the driver’s side center pillar. The spare tire is designed for emergency studs or nuts. This could cause the use. See specific instructions under the nuts to become loose. Stowing the damaged tire and tools heading “Wheels and tires” in the “8. Main- ¼ Retighten the wheel nuts when the Securely store the spare tire and jacking equip- tenance and do-it-yourself” section. vehicle has been driven for 600 miles ment in the vehicle. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, between the wheel and hub. etc.). WARNING 2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. When replacing a As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts ¼ Always make sure that the spare tire front tire, make sure the hole in the spare tire to the specified torque with a torque and jacking equipment are properly wheel is aligned with the pin on the brake wrench. secured after use. Such items can rotor. become dangerous projectiles in an 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel 6-6 In case of emergency

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster battery, the accident or sudden stop. instructions and precautions below must be 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle. ¼ The spare tire is designed for emer- followed. gency use. See specific instructions ¼ Whenever working on or near a bat- under the heading “Wheels and tires” WARNING tery, always wear suitable eye protec- in the “8. Maintenance and do-it- tors (for example, goggles or indus- yourself” section of this manual. ¼ If done incorrectly, jump starting can trial safety spectacles) and remove lead to a battery explosion, resulting rings, metal bands, or any other jew- in severe injury or death. It could also elry. Do not lean over the battery damage your vehicle. when jump starting. ¼ Explosive hydrogen gas is always ¼ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen present in the vicinity of the battery. battery. It could explode and cause Keep all sparks and flames away serious injury. from the battery. ¼ Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the con- tacted area with water. ¼ Keep battery out of the reach of children. ¼ The booster battery must be rated at

In case of emergency 6-7

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ CAUTION

¼ Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (−) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, etc. — not to the battery). ¼ Make sure that the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal. SCE0664 to the P (Park) position (automatic transmis- 5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let it WARNING sion models) or move the shift lever to the N run for a few minutes. (Neutral) position (manual transmission mod- 6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle at els). Switch off all unnecessary electrical Always follow the instructions below. about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine in the systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.). Failure to do so could result in damage normal manner. to the charging system and cause per- 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so sonal injury. equipped). Cover the battery with an old CAUTION cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as Do not keep the starter motor engaged 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, illustrated. (k1 - k4 ) position the two vehicles to bring their bat- for more than 10 seconds. If the engine teries into close proximity to each other. does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. again. 2. Apply parking brake. Move the selector lever 6-8 In case of emergency

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

7. After starting your engine, carefully discon- Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing. nect the negative cable and then the positive WARNING cable. CAUTION 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be ¼ Do not continue to drive if your ve- sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the ¼ Automatic transmission models can- hicle overheats. Doing so could vent holes as it may be contaminated with not be push started. Attempting to do cause engine damage or a vehicle corrosive acid. so may cause transmission damage. fire. ¼ Three-way catalyst equipped models ¼ To avoid the danger of being scalded, should not be started by pushing never remove the radiator cap while since the three-way catalyst may be the engine is still hot. When the ra- damaged. diator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly ¼ Never try to start the vehicle by tow- causing serious injury. ing it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the ve- ¼ Do not open the hood if steam is hicle to collide with the tow vehicle. coming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps: 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission to the P (Park) position). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the In case of emergency 6-9

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

windows, and move the temperature control When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in to maximum hot and the fan control to high WARNING Canada) and local regulations for towing must speed. be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could 3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a ¼ Be careful not to allow your hands, damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast hair, jewelry or clothing to come into available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the tem- contact with, or get caught in, engine operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure perature gauge indication returns to normal. belts or the engine cooling fan. proper towing and to prevent accidental damage 4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for ¼ The engine cooling fan can start at to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a steam or coolant escaping from the radiator any time when the coolant tempera- service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant to have the service operator carefully read the is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open ture is high. following precautions. the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen. 7. After the engine cools down, check the cool- 5. Open the engine hood. ant level in the reservoir tank with the engine WARNING running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if WARNING necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a ¼ Never ride in a vehicle that is being NISSAN dealer. towed. If steam or water is coming from the ¼ Never get under your vehicle after it engine, stand clear to prevent getting has been lifted by a tow truck. burned.

6. Visually check if the cooling fan is running. CAUTION The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. ¼ When towing, make sure that the If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does transmission, axles, steering system not run, stop the engine. and powertrain are in working condi-

6-10 In case of emergency

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ tion. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. ¼ Always attach safety chains before towing.

For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

SCE0342 SCE0489 TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN CAUTION NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the ¼ Never tow automatic transmission ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as models with the rear wheels on the illustrated. In case of emergency 6-11

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ground or four wheels on the ground WARNING (forward or backward) as this may cause serious and expensive damage ¼ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle ¼ Do not spin your tires at high speed. with the front wheels raised, always This could cause them to explode use towing dollies under the rear and result in serious injury. Parts of wheels. your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged. ¼ When towing rear wheel drive models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: CAUTION Turn the ignition key to the OFF po- SCE0605 sition, and secure the steering wheel ¼ Tow chains or cables must be at- in a straight ahead position with a VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a tached only to the main structural rope or similar device. Never secure stuck vehicle) members of the vehicle or the recov- the steering wheel by turning the Use the recovery hook by installing it in the front ery hook. Otherwise, the vehicle body ignition key to the LOCK position. of the vehicle. (The rear has no towing points.) will be damaged. This may damage the steering lock mechanism. 1. Remove the front license plate (if so ¼ Do not use the vehicle tie down equipped). hooks to free a vehicle stuck in sand, 2. Remove the recovery hook cover k1 from the snow, mud, etc. Never tow a vehicle bumper. using the vehicle tie down hooks. 3. Securely install the recovery hook k2 stored ¼ Always pull the cable straight out with jacking tools. from the front of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle. Make sure that the hook is properly secured in the stored place after use. 6-12 In case of emergency

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ¼ Release the accelerator pedal before shifting ¼ Pulling devices should be routed so between R and D (automatic transmission they do not touch any part of the models) or 1st and R (manual transmission suspension, steering, brake or cool- models). ing systems. ¼ Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55 ¼ Pull devices such as ropes or canvas km/h). straps are not recommended for use 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, in vehicle towing or recovery. contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure: 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system or Traction Control System (TCS) (if so equipped). 2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions. 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires. 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward. ¼ Shift back and forth between R (reverse) and D (drive) (automatic transmission models) or 1st (low) and R (reverse) (manual transmission models). ¼ Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion. In case of emergency 6-13

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MEMO

6-14 In case of emergency

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ...... 7-2 Cleaning interior ...... 7-5 Washing ...... 7-2 Floor mats ...... 7-5 Waxing ...... 7-3 Seat belts ...... 7-6 Removing spots ...... 7-3 Corrosion protection ...... 7-6 Underbody ...... 7-3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle Glass ...... 7-3 corrosion ...... 7-6 Aluminum alloy wheels ...... 7-4 Environmental factors influence the rate of Chrome parts ...... 7-4 corrosion ...... 7-6 Tire dressing ...... 7-4 To protect your vehicle from corrosion ...... 7-7

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. CAUTION ¼ For Roadster models, observe the following: In the following cases, please wash your vehicle • Do not use an automatic car wash as soon as possible to protect the paint surface. ¼ Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, or a high pressure car wash. The ¼ After a rainfall to prevent possible damage especially brushless ones, use some soft top may be damaged. from acid rain • acid for cleaning. The acid may react Avoid applying direct water pres- ¼ After driving on coastal roads with some plastic vehicle compo- sure, such as high pressured water nents, causing them to crack. This from household hoses, on the lin- ¼ When contaminants such as soot, bird drop- could affect their appearance, and ing of the soft top and vehicle pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on body. Avoid applying continuous the paint surface also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car water on the parts around the soft ¼ When dust or mud builds up on the surface wash to confirm that acid is not used. top and the windows. These may cause water to leak into the inside Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle ¼ Do not use strong household soap, of your vehicle. inside a garage or in a covered area. strong chemical detergents, gasoline When it is necessary to park outside, park in a or solvents. shady area or protect the vehicle with a body Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean ¼ Do not wash the vehicle in direct cover. water. sunlight or while the vehicle body is Be careful not to scratch the paint surface hot, as the surface may become Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to when putting on or removing the body water-spotted. cover. the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas ¼ Avoid using tight-napped or rough must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the WASHING cloths, such as washing mitts. Care drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and must be taken when removing wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- road salt. using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or a stances so the paint surface is not general purpose dish-washing liquid mixed with scratched or damaged. Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle. 7-2 Appearance and care

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Soft top care and cleaning (Roadster ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the models) or solvents. wax. ¼ If glass cleaner gets on the soft top, ¼ Proper care and handling should be observed to Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, immediately wash it off with clean maintain a good appearance of the soft top. cutting compounds or cleaners that may water. Improper care may cause the top cloth’s surface damage the vehicle finish. to stiffen, stain, or mat. Follow the instructions ¼ Do not apply direct water pressure, Machine compounding or aggressive polishing shown in this section. such as high pressured water from on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull It is not necessary to wash the soft top every household hoses, on the lining of the the finish or leave swirl marks. time you wash the vehicle body, but clean the soft top and vehicle body, as this may REMOVING SPOTS top regularly before it becomes quite dirty. Leav- cause water to leak into the inside of ing the soft top dirty or soiled for a long period your vehicle. Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, will cause deterioration to the quality of the top and tree sap as quickly as possible from the material. surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or After cleaning, always be sure the top and its staining. Special cleaning products are available Remove dust or dirt on the soft top with a soft storage are completely dry before opening the at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory brush or sponge, then rinse it with plenty of top. Opening the top while it is wet or damp may store. clean water. When the top is quite dirty, wash cause interior water damage, water stains or using a mild detergent, such as a general mildew on the top. UNDERBODY cleaner especially made for a cloth top or a general purpose dish-washing liquid, mixed with WAXING In areas where road salt is used in winter, the clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. Rinse the top underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will again with plenty of clean water to remove all Regular waxing protects the paint surface and prevent dirt and salt from building up and caus- traces of soap. helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing ing underbody and suspension corrosion. Be- is recommended to remove built-up wax residue fore the winter period and again in the spring, the CAUTION and to avoid a weathered appearance before underseal must be checked and, if necessary, reapplying wax. re-treated.

¼ Do not use strong household soap, A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the GLASS proper product. strong chemical detergents, gasoline Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film ¼ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash- from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to Appearance and care 7-3

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ become coated with a film after the vehicle is If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft staining or discoloring the wheels: following precautions: cloth will easily remove this film. ¼ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong ¼ Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating acid or alkali contents to clean the on the tire dissolves more easily with an CAUTION wheels. oil-based tire dressing. ¼ ¼ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help ¼ When cleaning the inside of the win- wheels when they are hot. The wheel prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves dows, do not use sharp-edged tools, (where it would be difficult to remove). temperature should be the same as abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based ambient temperature. ¼ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry disinfectant cleaners. They could towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com- ¼ damage the electrical conductors or Rinse the wheel to completely re- pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves. move the cleaner within 15 minutes rear window defroster elements. ¼ after the cleaner is applied. Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom- ¼ If glass cleaner gets on the soft top, mended by tire dressing manufacturer. immediately wash it off with clean water. (Roadster models) CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non- ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish. Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a TIRE DRESSING mild soap solution, especially during winter NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire months in areas where road salt is used. Salt dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to could discolor the wheels if not removed. the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it CAUTION may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire Follow the directions below to avoid while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

7-4 Appearance and care

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ CLEANING INTERIOR

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior pedal operation. Mats should be maintained trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum CAUTION with regular cleaning and replaced if they be- cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and come excessively worn. leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp- ¼ Never use benzine, thinner or any ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth. similar material. Regular care and cleaning is required in order to ¼ Small dirt particles can be abrasive maintain the appearance of the leather. and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do Before using any fabric protector, read the not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol- manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, bleach the seat material. detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean natural finish. the meter and gauge lens. ¼ Never use fabric protectors unless WARNING recommended by the manufacturer. ¼ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot meter or gauge lens covers. It may steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the lens cover. damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and FLOOR MATS result in serious personal injury. The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with Appearance and care 7-5

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ CORROSION PROTECTION

SEAT BELTS MOST COMMON FACTORS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. CORROSION Allow the belts to dry completely before using ¼ The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt them. See “Seat belt maintenance” in the “1. and debris in body panel sections, cavities, Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental and other areas. restraint system” section. ¼ Damage to paint and other protective coat- WARNING ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or INFLUENCE THE RATE OF chemical solvents to clean the seat SAI0012 CORROSION belts, since these may severely weaken Floor mat positioning aid the seat belt webbing. Moisture (driver’s side only) Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corro- This model includes a front floor mat bracket to sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor inside the vehicle, and should be removed for mats have been specially designed for your drying to avoid floor panel corrosion. vehicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Simply position Relative humidity the mat by placing the floor mat bracket through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high mat in the floorpan contour. relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where Periodically check to make certain that the mats atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is are properly positioned. used.

7-6 Appearance and care

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Temperature CAUTION A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated. ¼ Never remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compart- Air pollution ment by washing it out with a hose. Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will broom. accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will ¼ Never allow water or other liquids to also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces. come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE may damage them. FROM CORROSION ¼ Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are vehicle clean. extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion ¼ Always check for minor damage to the paint and deterioration of underbody components and repair it as soon as possible. such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. ¼ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. ¼ Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water For additional protection against rust and corro- as soon as possible. sion, which may be required in some areas, consult a NISSAN dealer.

Appearance and care 7-7

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MEMO

7-8 Appearance and care

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements ...... 8-2 Replacing spark plugs ...... 8-17 General maintenance ...... 8-2 Air cleaners ...... 8-18 Explanation of general maintenance items ...... 8-2 Windshield wiper blades ...... 8-19 Maintenance precautions ...... 8-5 Cleaning ...... 8-19 Engine compartment check locations ...... 8-7 Replacing ...... 8-20 Engine cooling system ...... 8-8 Brakes ...... 8-21 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-8 Self-adjusting brakes ...... 8-21 Changing engine coolant ...... 8-9 Brake pad wear indicators ...... 8-21 Engine oil ...... 8-9 Fuses ...... 8-21 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-9 Engine compartment ...... 8-22 Changing engine oil and filter ...... 8-10 Passenger compartment ...... 8-23 Automatic transmission fluid ...... 8-12 Keyfob battery replacement...... 8-24 Power steering fluid ...... 8-12 Lights ...... 8-26 Brake and clutch fluid ...... 8-13 Headlights ...... 8-27 Brake fluid ...... 8-13 Exterior and interior lights ...... 8-28 Clutch fluid ...... 8-14 Wheels and tires ...... 8-30 Window washer fluid ...... 8-14 Tire pressure ...... 8-30 Battery ...... 8-15 Tire labeling...... 8-34 Jump starting ...... 8-16 Types of tires ...... 8-36 Drive belts ...... 8-17 Tire chains ...... 8-37 Spark plugs ...... 8-17 Changing wheels and tires ...... 8-37

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have Performing general maintenance checks re- During the normal day-to-day operation of the minimum maintenance requirements with long quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few vehicle, general maintenance should be per- service intervals to save you both time and general automotive tools. formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If money. However, some day-to-day and regular These checks or inspections can be done by you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or maintenance is essential to maintain your yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN’s good mechanical condition, as well NISSAN dealer. NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you as its emission and engine performance. should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that Where to go for service: repairs are required. It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that scheduled maintenance, as well as general If maintenance service is required or your vehicle When performing any checks or maintenance maintenance, is performed. appears to malfunction, have the systems work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau- checked and tuned by a NISSAN dealer. tions” later in this section. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists EXPLANATION OF GENERAL maintenance care. You are a vital link in the and are kept up to date with the latest service MAINTENANCE ITEMS maintenance chain. information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They Additional information on the following Scheduled maintenance: are completely qualified to work on NISSAN items with “*” is found later in this section. vehicles before they work on your vehicle, For your convenience, both required and op- Outside the vehicle tional scheduled maintenance items are de- rather than after they have worked on it. scribed and listed in your “NISSAN Service and You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s The maintenance items listed here should be Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that service department performs the best job to performed from time to time, unless otherwise guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is meet the maintenance requirements of your ve- specified. performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals. hicle — in a reliable and economic way. Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors General maintenance: and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the trunk lid or back hatch. Also make sure that General maintenance includes those items all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. which should be checked during normal day-to- Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the day operation. They are essential for proper hood from opening when the primary latch is vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to released. perform these procedures regularly as prescribed. When driving in areas using road salt or other 8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. highway speeds, wheel balancing may be Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth needed. operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail For additional information regarding tires, refer to or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor operating properly and installed securely. Also Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty mat away from the pedal. check headlight aim. Information Booklet. Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular vehicle to one side when applied. Check the the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and basis. Check the windshield at least every six brake booster function. Be sure to keep floor mat check for any loose nuts. Tighten if necessary. months for cracks or other damage. Have a away from the pedal. damaged windshield repaired by a qualified re- Tire rotation*: Tires cannot be rotated in this pair facility. Parking brake: Check the parking brake op- vehicle. eration regularly. The vehicle should be securely Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking or wear if they do not wipe properly. and always prior to long distance trips. Adjust brake applied. If the parking brake needs to be the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to Inside the vehicle adjusted, see a NISSAN dealer. the pressure specified. Check carefully for dam- The maintenance items listed here should be Seats: Check seat position controls such as age, cuts or excessive wear. checked on a regular basis, such as when seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the they operate smoothly and that all latches lock transmitter components: Replace the TPMS vehicle, etc. securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap Automatic transmission P (Park) position the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all when the tires are replaced due to wear or age. mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the latched positions. Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in pulls to either side while driving on a straight and the P (Park) position without applying any Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal brakes. system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, tire wear, there may be a need for wheel align- Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for and are installed securely. Check the belt web- ment. smooth operation and make sure the pedal does bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal mat away from the pedal. Steering wheel: Check for changes in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ steering conditions, such as excessive free play, Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex- hard steering or strange noises. frayed, worn, cracked or oily. posed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all Engine oil level*: Check the level on the important to remove these substances, other- warning lights and chimes are operating prop- dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot, wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel erly. turning off the engine and waiting 10 minutes. lines and around the exhaust system. At the end Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly the wipers and washer operate properly and that supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the flushed with plain water, being careful to clean the wipers do not streak. exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of those areas where mud and dirt may accumu- late. For additional information, see “Cleaning exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble Windshield defroster: Check that the air exterior” in the “7. Appearance and care” sec- and correct it. (See “Precautions when starting comes out of the defroster outlets properly and tion. and driving” in the “5. Starting and driving” in good quantity when operating the heater or air section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).) Window washer fluid*: Check that there is conditioner. adequate fluid in the tank. Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, Under the hood and the vehicle oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has The maintenance items listed here should be been parked for a while. Water dripping from the checked periodically (for example, each time you air conditioner after use is normal. If you should check the engine oil or refuel). notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected imme- Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It diately. should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check severe conditions require frequent checks of the the level in the reservoir tank with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, battery fluid level. cracks, etc. Brake and clutch fluid levels*: Make sure that Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration when the engine is cold. or loose connections. 8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. CAUTION serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to before working on your vehicle. the vehicle. The following are general precau- ¼ Always wear eye protection when- ¼ Do not work under the hood while tions which should be closely observed. ever you work on your vehicle. the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. WARNING ¼ If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be ¼ Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed en- ¼ Park the vehicle on a level surface, sure there is proper ventilation for gine oil, engine coolant and/or other apply the parking brake securely and exhaust gases to escape. vehicle fluids can damage the envi- block the wheels to prevent the ve- ¼ Never get under the vehicle while it is ronment. Always conform to local hicle from moving. For manual trans- supported only by a jack. If it is nec- regulations for disposal of vehicle mission models, move the shift lever essary to work under the vehicle, fluid. to N (Neutral) position. For automatic support it with safety stands. transmission models, move the se- ¼ Never connect or disconnect the bat- ¼ Keep smoking materials, flame and lector lever to P (Park). tery or any transistorized component sparks away from the fuel tank and while the ignition switch is in the ON ¼ Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF battery. position. or LOCK position when performing ¼ On gasoline engine models, the fuel any parts replacement or repairs. ¼ Never leave the engine or automatic filter or fuel lines should be serviced transmission related component har- ¼ If you must work with the engine by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel nesses disconnected while the igni- running, keep your hands, clothing, lines are under high pressure even tion switch is in the ON position. hair and tools away from moving when the engine is off. fans, belts and any other moving parts. This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items ¼ It is advisable to secure or remove which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. any loose clothing and remove any A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also avail- Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section. You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS 1. Fuse/fusible link holder 2. Battery 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T models) 6. Window washer fluid reservoir 7. Power steering fluid reservoir 8. Air cleaner 9. Radiator filler cap 10. Engine drive belts 11. Engine coolant reservoir 12. Engine oil dipstick Do not tamper with the strut tower bar adjustment kA . The strut tower bar has been adjusted to the most suitable position at the factory. CAUTION

Tampering with the strut tower bar adjustment may cause a noise while driving or damage to the hood or engine.

SDI2050 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze cool- Outside temperature Deminer- alized ant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains down to Anti- water/ rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional freeze cooling system additives are not necessary. distilled °C °F water WARNING −35 −30 50% 50%

¼ Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. CAUTION Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be When adding or replacing coolant, be caused by high pressure fluid escap- sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN ing from the radiator. See precau- Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or SDI2051 tions in “If your vehicle overheats” equivalent with the proper mixture ratio CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT found in the “6. In case of emer- of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineral- LEVEL gency” section of this manual. ized water/distilled water. The use of ¼ The radiator is equipped with a pres- other types of coolant solutions may Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank damage your engine cooling system. when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is sure type radiator cap. To prevent k k engine damage, use only a genuine below MIN 1 , add coolant up to the MAX 2 level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the NISSAN radiator cap. coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX k2 level. Tighten the cap securely after adding engine coolant.

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ENGINE OIL

If the engine cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by a ¼ Keep coolant out of reach of children NISSAN dealer. and pets. CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Contact a NISSAN dealer if replacement is Check your local regulations. required. ¼ Major cooling system repairs should be performed by a NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. ¼ Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating. SDI2045 WARNING CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply ¼ To avoid being scalded, never change the parking brake. the coolant when the engine is hot. 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches ¼ Never remove the radiator cap when the operating temperature. the engine is hot. Serious burns 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 could be caused by high pressure minutes for the oil to drain back into the fluid escaping from the radiator. oil pan. ¼ Avoid direct skin contact with used 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Rein- coolant. If skin contact is made, wash sert it all the way. thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil Vehicle set-up level. It should be between the H and L marks k1 . If the oil level is below the L mark k2 , 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply remove the oil filler cap and pour recom- the parking brake. Do not mended oil through the opening. 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches overfill k3 . the operating temperature. 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. 3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 It is normal to add some oil between oil minutes. maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity 4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suit- of operating conditions. able floor jack and safety jack stands. ¼ Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle CAUTION jack-up points. SDI2052 ¼ A suitable adapter should be attached to the Oil level should be checked regularly. jack stand saddle. Engine oil and filter Operating the engine with an insuffi- 5. Remove the plastic engine undercover. 1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug cient amount of oil can damage the k engine, and such damage is not covered a. Remove the small plastic clip at the center 1 . by warranty. point of the undercover. 2. Remove the oil filler cap. b. Then remove the other bolts that hold the 3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and undercover in place. completely drain the oil. CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER CAUTION WARNING Change the engine oil and filter according to the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN Service Make sure the correct lifting and sup- ¼ Prolonged and repeated contact with and Maintenance Guide”. port points are used to avoid vehicle used engine oil may cause skin damage. cancer.

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ¼ Try to avoid direct skin contact with CAUTION CAUTION used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand Be sure to remove any old gasket mate- The dipstick must be inserted in place to cleaner as soon as possible. rial remaining on the mounting surface prevent oil spillage from the dipstick ¼ Keep used engine oil out of reach of of the engine. Failure to do so could hole while filling the engine with oil. children. lead to engine damage. See “Capacities and recommended fuel/ 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer CAUTION engine oil. information” section for drain and refill capac- 7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight ity. The drain and refill capacity depends on Be careful not to burn yourself, as the resistance is felt, then tighten additionally the oil temperature and drain time. Use these engine oil is hot. more than 2/3 turn. specifications for reference only. Always use Oil filter tightening torque: the dipstick to determine the proper amount ¼ Waste oil must be disposed of properly. of oil in the engine. 11 to 15 ft-lb ¼ Check your local regulations. (14.7 to 20.5 N⋅m) 10. Start the engine and check for leakage around the drain plug and the oil filter. Perform steps 4 to 7 when the engine oil filter 8. Clean and re-install the drain plug and a new Correct as required. change is needed. washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. 11. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench minutes. Check the oil level with the dip- k2 . Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand. Drain plug tightening torque: stick. Add engine oil if necessary. 5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface 22 to 29 ft-lb After the operation with a clean rag. (29 to 39 N⋅m) 1. Install the engine undercover into position as Do not use excessive force. outlined in the following steps. 9. Refill engine with recommended oil and in- a. Pull the center of the small plastic clip out. stall the cap securely. b. Hold the engine undercover into position. c. Insert the clip through the undercover into the Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION POWER STEERING FLUID FLUID hole in the frame, then push the center of the When checking or replacement is required, we clip in to lock the clip in place. recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing. d. Install the other bolts that hold the undercover in place. Be careful not to strip the CAUTION bolts or over-tighten them. 2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground. ¼ Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J 3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly. ATF. Do not mix with other fluids. ¼ Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not cov- SDI1443 ered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank. The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range at fluid temperatures of 122 - 176°F (50 - 80°C) or using the COLD range at fluid temperatures of 32 - 86°F (0 - 30°C). If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF fluid. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

For additional brake and clutch fluid information, CAUTION refer to “Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer ¼ Do not overfill. information” section of this manual. ¼ Recommended fluid is Genuine WARNING NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

¼ Use only new fluid from a sealed For more information regarding suitable equiva- container. Old, inferior or contami- lents, see “Capacities and recommended nated fluid may damage the brake fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con- system. The use of improper fluids sumer information” section. can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability. SDI1923 ¼ Clean the filler cap before removing. BRAKE FLUID ¼ Brake fluid is poisonous and should Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is be stored carefully in marked con- k tainers out of the reach of children. below the MIN line 2 or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line k1 . If fluid must be added fre- CAUTION quently, the system should be thoroughly checked by a NISSAN dealer. Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ WINDOW WASHER FLUID

WARNING

Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

¼ Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. SDI1906 SDI2053 This may result in damage to the paint. CLUTCH FLUID Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning light comes on. ¼ Do not fill the window washer reser- Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid voir tank with washer fluid concen- Add a washer solvent to the washer fluid for level is below the MIN line k2 , add Genuine trates at full strength. Some methyl better cleaning. In the winter season, add a NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or alcohol based washer fluid concen- equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line k1 . windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio. trates may permanently stain the If fluid is added frequently, the system should be grille if spilled while filling the win- thoroughly checked by a NISSAN dealer. Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind- dow washer reservoir tank. shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti- freeze or equivalent. ¼ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ BATTERY

¼ Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean 3. Close and lock all the doors using the washer reservoir tank to mix the the battery with a solution of baking soda and key or keyfob. washer fluid concentrate and water. water. 4. Disconnect the negative (−) battery ter- ¼ Make certain the terminal connections are minal. clean and securely tightened. 5. Securely close the hood. ¼ If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or To connect the negative (−) battery termi- longer, disconnect the (−) negative battery nal, perform the procedure in the following terminal to prevent discharging it. order. Otherwise, the window and the side roof panel/top side rail may contact and be CAUTION damaged. 1. Unlock (using the key) and open the When the battery cable is removed from driver side door. Do not close the door. the battery terminal, do not close either 2. Open the hood. of the front doors. The automatic window adjusting function will not work, 3. Connect the negative (−) battery terminal. Then close the hood. and the side roof panel/top side rail may be damaged by doing so. 4. Fully open the driver side door window. 5. Close the driver side door and the win- To disconnect the negative (−) battery ter- dow. minal, perform the procedure in the following order. Otherwise, the window and the WARNING side roof panel/top side rail may contact and be damaged. ¼ Do not expose the battery to flames 1. Close the windows. or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas, generated by battery fluid, is explo- 2. Open the hood. sive. Do not allow battery fluid to

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. ¼ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce DI0137MA SDI1480 battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be JUMP STARTING between the UPPER LEVEL k1 and LOWER ¼ When working on or near a battery, LEVEL k2 lines. If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting” always wear suitable eye protection in the “6. In case of emergency” section. If the and remove all jewelry. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled engine does not start by jump starting, the water to bring the level to the indicator in each battery may have to be replaced. Contact a ¼ Battery posts, terminals and related filler opening. Do not overfill. NISSAN dealer. accessories contain lead and lead Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under compounds. Wash hands after han- severe conditions require frequent checks of the dling. battery fluid level. ¼ Keep the battery out of the reach of 1. Remove the cell plugs kA . children. 2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL line k1 . 3. Tighten cell plugs. 8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS unexpectedly. If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer for servicing. 1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesion or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have WARNING it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer. Be sure the engine and ignition switch 2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition. are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION SDI2061 1. Power steering fluid pump Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect 2. Alternator socket can damage the spark plugs. 3. Crankshaft pulley 4. Air conditioner compressor 5. Drive belt auto-tensioner

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belts. The engine could rotate

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ AIR CLEANERS

the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth. WARNING

¼ Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine backfires. If it is not there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be SDI2020 careful when working on the engine Iridium-tipped spark plugs with the air cleaner removed. It is not necessary to replace the iridium-tipped ¼ Never pour fuel into the throttle body spark plugs as frequently as the conventional or attempt to start the engine with type spark plugs since they will last much longer. the air cleaner removed. Doing so Follow the maintenance log shown in the could result in serious injury. “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”, but do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping. SDI2054 Always replace spark plugs with recom- To remove the filter from the air cleaner, pull off mended or equivalent ones. the retainers k1 and pull the unit upward k2 . The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte- nance Guide”. When replacing the filter, wipe 8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

rinse the blade with clear water. If your wind- CAUTION shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades. ¼ After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise it may be damaged when the engine hood is opened. ¼ Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure. ¼ Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SDI1649 REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. 1. Pull the wiper arm. 2. Push the release tab kA , then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove k1 . 3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm SDI1730A until a click sounds. If necessary, clean the windshield washer nozzle kA with a needle or small pin kB . *1: Only for passenger’s side wiper arm *2: Adjustable washer nozzles

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ BRAKES FUSES

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the the function or performance of the brake system. brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer. Proper brake inspection intervals should SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES be followed. For additional information, see the appropriate maintenance log shown in the Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide. brakes. The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not SDI1751 return to normal. Some vehicles are equipped with engine compartment and passenger compartment fuse BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS boxes that use only type kA fuses. Other vehicles are equipped with type kA fuses in the The disc brake pads on your vehicle have au- engine compartment fuse box and type kB fuses dible wear indicators. When a brake pad rein the passenger compartment fuse box. quires replacement, it will make a high pitched Type kA fuses are provided as spare fuses. They scraping or screeching sound when the vehicle are stored in the passenger compartment fuse is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is box. depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. Type kA fuses can be installed in the engine compartment and passenger compartment fuse Under some driving or climate conditions, occa- boxes. sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SDI1752 SDI1479B SDI1753

If a type kA fuse is used to replace a type kB ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2. Open the engine hood and remove the cover fuse, the type kA fuse will not be level with the on the battery and the fuse/fusible link holder. fuse pocket as shown in the illustration. This will CAUTION 3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover by not affect the performance of the fuse. Make k k sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely. pushing the tabs 1 and lifting the cover 2 . Never use a fuse of a higher or lower Type kB fuses cannot be installed in the under- 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The amperage rating than that specified on hood fuse boxes. Only use type kA fuses in the fuse puller is located in the passenger com- underhood fuse boxes. the fuse box cover. This could damage partment fuse box. the electrical system or cause a fire. 5. If the fuse is open kA , replace it with a new fuse kB . Spare fuses are stored in the pas- If any electrical equipment does not operate, senger compartment fuse box. check for an open fuse. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical 1. Be sure the ignition switch and headlight system checked and repaired by a NISSAN switch are OFF. dealer. 8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Fusible links If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

SDI1962 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 2. Open the fuse box lid k1 . 3. Pinch the fuse perpendicularly with the fuse CAUTION puller k2 and pull it out.

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swal- low the battery and removed parts.

SDI1754

4. If the fuse is open kA , replace it with a new fuse kB . Spare fuses k3 are stored in the fuse box. 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer.

SDI1608 Replace the battery as follows: 1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. 2. Replace the battery with a new one. Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent 8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Make sure that the ⊕ side faces the approved by the party responsible for com- bottom case. pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. ¼ Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunc- This device complies with Part 15 of the tion. FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. 3. Close the lid securely. Operation is subject to the following two 4. Push the keyfob button two or three times to conditions: (1) This device may not cause check its operation. harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance cluding interference that may cause undes- for replacement. ired operation of the device. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 4 above. ¼ Be careful not to touch the circuit board and the battery terminal. ¼ An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. ¼ The keyfob is water-resistant; however, if it gets wet, immediately wipe it completely dry. ¼ When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the keyfob. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ LIGHTS

k1 Front view 1. Headlight (low-beam, high-beam) 2. Spot light 3. Front park light 4. Front turn signal light 5. Front side marker light k2 Rear view (Coupe), k3 Rear view (Roadster) 6. Luggage compartment light (Coupe) or Trunk light (Roadster) 7. High-mounted stop light 8. Rear combination light (Side marker, Stop/Tail) 9. License plate lights 10. Rear combination light (Back-up, Turn signal)

SDI2058 8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ HEADLIGHTS Use the same number and wattage as originally installed: Replacing Bulb no. (Wattage) D2S (35W) - Xenon low/high-beam If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer. Xenon headlight model: Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and WARNING the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer. HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see “Headlight and turn signal switch” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No. Front turn signal light* 28/8 3457NA Front park light* 5 T10 Front side marker light* (LED) — Rear combination light (Upper) Stop/Tail* (LED) — Side marker* (LED) — Rear combination light (Lower) Back-up* 21 T20 Turn signal* 21 T20 License plate light (x 2) 5 T10 High-mounted stop light* (LED) — Spot light 8 — Luggage compartment light (Coupe) 5 — Trunk light (Roadster)* 3.4 — Vanity mirror light 1.8 — MDI0006 Cup holder light* 1.1 — Replacement procedures Rear floor box light* 1.4 — All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When *: See a NISSAN dealer for replacement. replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts. cover.

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SDI1779

SDI1572 Interior light (Roadster) Be careful not to snap the nails kA on the plastic cover when removing it.

SDI1450A SDI1451 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ WHEELS AND TIRES

TIRE PRESSURE Tire inflation pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring System Check the tire pressures (including the (TPMS) spare) often and always prior to long This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure distance trips. The recommended tire Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres- pressure specifications are shown on the sure of all tires except the spare. When the low Tire and Loading Information label under tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of the “COLD TIRE PRESSURE” heading. your tires is significantly under-inflated. The Tire and Loading Information label is The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, pressures should be checked regularly this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving). because: SDI1401A ¼ For more details, refer to “Low tire pressure Most tires naturally lose air over time. warning light” in the “2. Instruments and con- ¼ Tires can lose air suddenly when trols” section, “Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section, driven over potholes or other objects and “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emergency” or if the vehicle strikes a curb while section. parking. The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect capacity may also result in fail- tire life and vehicle handling. ure of other vehicle components. WARNING ¼ Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your ¼ Improperly inflated tires can fail vehicle, use a tire pressure suddenly and cause an acci- gauge to ensure that the tire dent. pressures are at the specified level. ¼ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing (GVWR) is located on the ¼ For additional information re- F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica- garding tires, refer to “Impor- tion label. The vehicle weight tant Tire Safety Information” capacity is indicated on the Tire (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- and Loading Information label. tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Do not load your vehicle be- Information Booklet. yond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ originally installed on the vehicle at the factory. k4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR. k5 Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling” later in this section. k6 Spare tire size or compact spare tire size (if so equipped).

SDI1948 Tire and Loading Information label k2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor- k1 Seating capacity: The maximum mation in the “Technical and con- number of occupants that can be sumer information” section. seated in the vehicle. k3 Original size: The size of the tires

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 3. Remove the gauge. Coupe Cold Tire 4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge model Size Inflation stem and compare it to the specifica- Pressure tion shown on the Tire and Loading Front Information label. Original 225/45R18 240 kPa 245/40R18 (35 psi) 5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too Tire much air is added, press the core of Rear 245/45R18 240 kPa the valve stem briefly with the tip of the Original 265/35R19 (35 psi) gauge stem to release pressure. Re- Tire check the pressure and add or release Spare 420 kPa air as needed. Tire T145/80D17 (60 psi) SDI1949 6. Install the valve stem cap. Checking the tire pressure 7. Check the pressure of all other tires, Roadster Cold Tire 1. Remove the valve stem cap from the including the spare. model Size Inflation tire. Pressure 2. Press the pressure gauge squarely Front Original 225/45R18 240 kPa onto the valve stem. Do not press too Tire (35 psi) hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound Rear 240 kPa of air escaping from the tire is heard Original 245/45R18 Tire (35 psi) while checking the pressure, reposi- tion the gauge to eliminate this leak- Spare T145/80D17 420 kPa age. Tire (60 psi)

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ tire’s ratio of height to width. 4. R: The “R” stands for radial. 5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches. 6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law. SDI1575 SDI1951 7. Tire Speed Rating. You should not Example Example TIRE LABELING k1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating. Federal law requires tire manufacturers 95H) to place standardized information on the 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de- sidewall of all tires. This information iden- signed for passenger vehicles. (Not all tifies and describes the fundamental tires have this information.) characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) 2. Three-digit number (215): This num- for safety standard certification. The TIN ber gives the width in millimeters of the can be used to identify the tire in case of tire from sidewall edge to sidewall a recall. edge. 3. Two-digit number (65): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the 8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op- load in kilograms and pounds that tional) can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, 5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture always use a tire that has the same 6. Four numbers represent the week and load rating as the factory installed year the tire was built. For example, the tire. numbers 3103 means the 31st week k6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” of 2003. If these numbers are missing, Indicates whether the tire requires an then look on the other sidewall of the inner tube (“tube type”) or not tire. (“tubeless”). k3 Tire ply composition and material k7 The word “radial” SDI1607 The number of layers or plies of Example The word “radial” is shown if the tire k2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire has radial structure. manufacturers also must indicate the new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX k8 Manufacturer or brand name materials in the tire, which include XXXX) Manufacturer or brand name is steel, nylon, polyester, and others. shown. 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart- k ment of Transportation”. The 4 Maximum permissible inflation pres- Other tire-related terminology: sure symbol can be placed above, In addition to the many terms that are below or to the left or right of the This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in defined throughout this section, Intended Tire Identification Number. Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that the tire. Do not exceed the maximum contains a whitewall, bears white letter- 2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identi- permissible inflation pressure. fication mark ing or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or k5 Maximum load rating model name molding that is higher or 3. Two-digit code: Tire size This number indicates the maximum deeper than the same molding on the Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the Snow tires pressure monitoring system (TPMS). outward facing sidewall of an asymmetri- If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select cal tire that has a particular side that must ¼ For additional information regarding tires equivalent in size and load rating to the always face outward when mounted on a tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety original equipment tires. If you do not, it can vehicle. Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In- adversely affect the safety and handling of your formation” (Canada) in the Warranty vehicle. TYPES OF TIRES Information Booklet. Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not WARNING All season tires match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. ¼ When changing or replacing tires, be NISSAN specifies all season tires on some sure all four tires are of the same models to provide good performance for use all If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy type (i.e., Summer, All Season or year round, including snowy and icy road condi- conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of tions. All season tires are identified by ALL Snow) and construction. A NISSAN snow or all season tires on all four wheels. SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow dealer may be able to help you with tires have better snow traction than all season For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires information about tire type, size, tires and may be more appropriate in some may be used. However, some provinces and speed rating and availability. areas. states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. ¼ Replacement tires may have a lower Summer tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow speed rating than the factory tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than equipped tires, and may not match NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models that of non-studded snow tires. the potential maximum vehicle to provide superior performance on dry roads. speed. Never exceed the maximum Summer tire performance in snow and ice will be speed rating of the tire. substantially reduced. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall. ¼ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could af- If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy fect the proper operation of the tire conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ TIRE CHAINS mended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility Tire rotation CAUTION of whipping action damage to the fenders or undercarriage. If possible, avoid fully loading Tires cannot be rotated in this vehicle, as Tire chains/cables should not be in- your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, front tires are different size from rear tires stalled on 265/35R19 size tires. Installa- drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your ve- and the direction of wheel rotation is fixed tion of the tire chains/cables on hicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling in each tire. 265/35R19 size tires will cause damage and performance may be adversely affected. to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire ¼ Never install the tire chains on a T-type A pin is on the front brake rotor to prevent chains/cables, you should install spare tire. the rear wheels from being installed in 245/45R18 size tires on your vehicle. ¼ Do not use the tire chains on dry roads. place of the front wheels. The spare tire can be installed in place of the front and ¼ Tire chains must be installed only on the Use of tire chains may be prohibited according rear wheels and not on the front wheels. rear wheels. When installing the spare to location. Check the local laws before installing tire in the front wheel, the hole in the tire chains. When installing tire chains, make spare tire wheel must be aligned with the sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain pin on the brake rotor. manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on WARNING vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are ¼ designed to meet the SAE standard minimum Retighten the wheel nuts when the clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle has been driven for 600 miles vehicle suspension or body component required (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, to accommodate the use of a winter traction etc.). device (tire chains or cables). The minimum ¼ For additional information regarding clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recom- Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In- the tire(s) should be replaced. formation” (Canada) in the Warranty ¼ The original tires have built-in Information Booklet. tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced. ¼ Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be SDI1663 obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure 1. Wear indicator and possible personal injury. 2. Wear indicator location mark ¼ Improper service of the spare Tire wear and damage tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to WARNING repair the spare tire, contact a NISSAN dealer. ¼ Tires should be periodically in- ¼ For additional information re- spected for wear, cracking, garding tires, refer to “Impor- bulging or objects caught in the tant Tire Safety Information” tread. If excessive wear, cracks, (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- bulging or deep cuts are found,

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ tion” (Canada) in the Warranty reason, always replace with wheels been repaired. Such wheels or tires Information Booklet. which have the same off-set dimen- could have structural damage and sion. Wheels of a different off-set could fail without warning. could cause premature tire wear, Replacing wheels and tires ¼ The use of retread tire is not recom- possibly degraded vehicle handling mended. When replacing a tire, use the same size, speed characteristics and/or interference rating and load carrying capacity as originally with the brake discs/drums. Such in- ¼ For additional information regarding equipped. See “Specifications” in the “9. Tech- terference can lead to decreased tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety nical and consumer information” section for rec- braking efficiency and/or early brake Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In- ommended types and sizes of tires and wheels. pad/shoe wear. formation” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. ¼ When a spare tire is mounted or a WARNING wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure Wheel balance ¼ The use of tires other than those warning light will flash for approxi- recommended or the mixed use of Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling mately 1 minute. The light will remain and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can tires of different brands, construction on after 1 minute. Contact your get out of balance. Therefore, they should be (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread NISSAN dealer as soon as possible balanced as required. patterns can adversely affect the ride, for tire replacement and/or system Wheel balance service should be performed braking, handling, ground clearance, resetting. body-to-tire clearance, tire chain with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the front wheels on the vehicle could lead to clearance, speedometer calibration, ¼ Replacing tires with those not origi- transmission damage. headlight aim and bumper height. nally specified by NISSAN could af- Some of these effects may lead to fect the proper operation of the For additional information regarding tires, refer to accidents and could result in serious TPMS. “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty personal injury. ¼ Do not install a damaged or de- Information booklet. ¼ If the wheels are changed for any formed wheel or tire even if it has

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Care of wheels ¼ Drive carefully while the T-type spare since it may get caught. ¼ Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle tire is installed. ¼ Do not use the T-type spare tire on to maintain their appearance. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking other vehicles. ¼ Clean the inner side of the wheels when the while driving. ¼ Do not use more than one T-type wheel is changed or the underside of the ¼ Periodically check the T-type spare vehicle is washed. spare tire at the same time. tire inflation pressure, and always ¼ Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing keep it at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). ¼ Do not tow a trailer while the T-type the wheels. spare tire is installed. ¼ Do not drive your vehicle at speeds ¼ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. ¼ Do not use tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Tire chains will not fit ¼ NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas properly on the T-type spare tire and where it is used during winter. may cause damage to the vehicle. Spare tire (T-type spare tire) ¼ Tire tread of the T-type spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the stan- Observe the following precautions if the T-type dard tire. Replace the T-type spare spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle tire as soon as the tread wear indica- could be damaged or involved in an accident. tors appear. CAUTION ¼ Because the T-type spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground ¼ The T-type spare tire should be used clearance is reduced. To avoid dam- for emergency use only. It should be age to the vehicle, do not drive over replaced by the standard tire at the obstacles. Also, do not drive the ve- first opportunity. hicle through an automatic car wash

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MEMO

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MEMO

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ...... 9-2 Vehicle loading information ...... 9-13 Fuel recommendation ...... 9-3 Terms ...... 9-13 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ...... 9-5 Vehicle load capacity...... 9-14 Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant Loading tips ...... 9-16 recommendations ...... 9-6 Measurement of weights ...... 9-16 Specifications ...... 9-7 Towing a trailer ...... 9-17 Engine ...... 9-7 Maximum load limits ...... 9-17 Wheels and tires...... 9-8 Towing safety ...... 9-18 Dimensions and weights ...... 9-8 Flat towing...... 9-21 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another Automatic transmission ...... 9-22 country ...... 9-9 Manual transmission ...... 9-22 Vehicle identification ...... 9-9 Uniform tire quality grading ...... 9-22 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ...... 9-9 Emission control system warranty ...... 9-23 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) ..... 9-9 Engine serial number ...... 9-10 Reporting safety defects (US only) ...... 9-23 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 9-10 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test Emission control information label ...... 9-10 (US only) ...... 9-24 Tire and loading information label ...... 9-11 Event data recorders (EDR) ...... 9-25 Air conditioner specification label ...... 9-11 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information ... 9-26 Installing front license plate ...... 9-12 In the event of a collision ...... 9-26

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/ LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity. Capacity (Approximate) Recommended US Imp Liter specifications measure measure Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 76 Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1 Engine oil (Drain and refill)*2 With oil filter change 5-1/8 qt 4-3/8 qt 4.9 ¼ Engine oil with API Certification Mark*3 Without oil filter change 4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6 ¼ Viscosity SAE 5W-30 Cooling system With reservoir 9-1/2 qt 7-7/8 qt 9.0 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent Reservoir 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8 50% Demineralized or distilled water Automatic transmission fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*4 Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity Manual transmission gear oil — — — SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90 Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5, Viscosity SAE Differential gear oil — — — 80W-90*5 Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper fluid level according to the instructions in Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*6 Brake and clutch fluid the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*7 or equivalent DOT 3 Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*8 Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent *1: For additional information, see “Fuel recommendation” later in this section. *2: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil. *3: For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” later in this section. *4: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. *5: For hot areas, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 32°F (0°C). *6: Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid or DEXRONTM VI type ATF may also be used. *7: Available in mainland US through a NISSAN dealer. *8: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” in this section for air conditioner specification label.

9-2 Technical and consumer information

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ FUEL RECOMMENDATION gests that you use reformulated gasoline when ¼ Under no circumstances should a available. Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane leaded gasoline be used, because rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) this will damage the three-way cata- Gasoline containing oxygenates number (Research octane number 96). lyst. Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded ¼ Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI Your vehicle is not designed to run NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of number (Research octane number 91) may be on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can temporarily used, but only under the following which the oxygenate content and the fuel com- damage the fuel system components precautions: patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily and is not covered by the NISSAN determined. If in doubt, ask your service station ¼ Have the fuel tank filled only partially with vehicle limited warranty. manager. unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take unleaded premium gasoline as soon as pos- the following precautions as the usage of such sible. Gasoline specifications fuels may cause vehicle performance problems ¼ Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accelera- NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets and/or fuel system damage. tion. the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi- ¼ The fuel should be unleaded and have cations where it is available. Many of the auto- However, for maximum vehicle perfor- an octane rating no lower than that mobile manufacturers developed this specifica- mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso- recommended for unleaded gasoline. tion to improve emission control system and line is recommended. ¼ vehicle performance. Ask your service station If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC methanol blend, is used, it should con- CAUTION specifications. tain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to Reformulated gasoline 15%.) ¼ Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu- ¼ If a methanol blend is used, it should control system, and may also affect lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should the warranty coverage. designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug- also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion in- Technical and consumer information 9-3

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ hibitors. If not properly formulated with Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN dealer or other competent service fa- appropriate cosolvents and corrosion cility. inhibitors, such methanol blends may NISSAN does not recommend the use of any However, now and then you may notice cause fuel system damage and/or ve- aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel in- light spark knock for a short time while hicle performance problems. At this jector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve de- accelerating or driving up hills. This is no time, sufficient data is not available to posit removers, etc.) which are sold commer- cause for concern, because you get the ensure that all methanol blends are cially. Many of these additives intended for gum, greatest fuel benefit when there is light suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles. varnish or deposit removal may contain active spark knock for a short time under heavy If any undesirable driveability problems such as solvents or similar ingredients that can be harm- engine load. engine stalling and hard hot starting are experi- ful to the fuel system and engine. enced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, imme- Octane rating tips diately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark cause paint damage. knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you E-85 fuel detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the above stated E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel octane rating, or if you hear steady spark ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do knock while holding a steady speed on not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. govern- level roads, have your dealer correct the ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing condition. Failure to correct the condition pumps to be identified by a small, square, or- is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN ange and black label with the common abbre- is not responsible. viation or the appropriate percentage for that Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking, region. after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage to the engine. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a 9-4 Technical and consumer information

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used. Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage. Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a STI0505 high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When k1 API certification mark Select only engine oils that meet the American replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its k2 API service symbol Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna- equivalent for the reason described in “Change tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval intervals”. ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis- Change intervals RECOMMENDATION cosity standard. These oils have the API certifi- The oil and oil filter change intervals for your Selecting the correct oil cation mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label engine are based on the use of the specified It is essential to choose the correct grade, should not be used as they could cause engine quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satis- damage. specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine factory engine life and performance. See “Ca- Oil additives life. Damage to engines caused by improper pacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” ear- maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil lier in this section. NISSAN recommends the use quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the additives. The use of an oil additive is not of an energy conserving oil in order to improve new NISSAN vehicle limited warranties. fuel economy. necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Your engine was filled with a high quality engine Technical and consumer information 9-5

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ oil when it was built. You do not have to change AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your the oil before the first recommended change REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT air conditioner system. interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. RECOMMENDATIONS Operation under the following conditions may The air conditioner system in your NISSAN require more frequent oil and filter changes: vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, ¼ repeated short distance driving at cold out- NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or the side temperatures exact equivalents. ¼ driving in dusty conditions ¼ extensive idling CAUTION ¼ towing a trailer The use of any other refrigerant or lubri- ¼ stop and go commuting cant will cause severe damage to the air Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance conditioning system and will require the Guide” for the maintenance schedule. replacement of all air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.

9-6 Technical and consumer information

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

Model VQ35HR Type Gasoline, 4-cycle Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60° Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4) Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498) Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6*1 Idle speed rpm See the emission control label on the Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm underside of the hood. CO percentage at idle speed [No air] % Spark plug Standard FXE22HR-11 Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) STI0425 *1: Cylinder number Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Road wheel Vehicle body Coupe Roadster

Model Type Position Size Offset Overall length in (mm) 169.8 (4,314) 169.8 (4,314) in (mm) Front 18 x 8JJ 1.18 (30) Overall width in (mm) 71.5 (1,815) 71.5 (1,815) Rear 18 x 8-1/2JJ 1.30 (33) Coupe Aluminum Overall height in (mm) 52.1 (1,323) 52.5 (1,333) Front 18 x 9JJ* 1.18 (30) Rear 19 x 10JJ* 1.18 (30) Front tread in (mm) 60.5 (1,536) 60.5 (1,536) Front 18 x 8JJ 1.18 (30) 60.6 (1,540)*1 Roadster Aluminum Rear tread in (mm) 60.6 (1,540) Rear 18 x 8-1/2JJ 1.30 (33) 60.9 (1,546)*2

Tire Wheelbase in (mm) 104.3 (2,650) 104.3 (2,650) Model Type Position Size Pressure (COLD) Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg) Front 225/45R18 91W 240 kPa (35 psi) (GVWR) Rear 245/45R18 96W 240 kPa (35 psi) Conventional Coupe Front 245/40R18 93W* 240 kPa (35 psi) Gross axle weight rating See the F.M.V.S.S. or C.M.V.S.S. certification label on the driver’s side Rear 265/35R19 94W* 240 kPa (35 psi) (GAWR) lock pillar. Spare — T145/80D17 107M 420 kPa (60 psi) Front lb (kg) Front 225/45R18 91W 240 kPa (35 psi) Road- Conventional Rear 245/45R18 96W 240 kPa (35 psi) Rear lb (kg) ster Spare — T145/80D17 107M 420 kPa (60 psi) *1: For model with 245/45R 18 tires *: For option *2: For model with 265/35R 19 tires

9-8 Technical and consumer information

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine. Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded engine gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according STI0320 STI0513 to the country, state, province or district; there- VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER fore, vehicle specifications may differ. (VIN) PLATE (chassis number) When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district The vehicle identification number plate is at- The number is stamped as shown. and registered, its modifications, transpor- tached as shown. This number is the identifica- tation, and registration are the responsibil- tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible registration. for any inconvenience that may result.

Technical and consumer information 9-9

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ STI0516 STI0322 STI0514 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. EMISSION CONTROL The number is stamped on the engine as shown. CERTIFICATION LABEL INFORMATION LABEL The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards The emission control information label is at- (F.M.V.S.S.) or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety tached as shown. Standards (C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

9-10 Technical and consumer information

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ STI0366 STI0515 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL LABEL The cold tire inflation pressure is shown on the The air conditioner specification label is affixed Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the inside of the hood as shown. driver side center pillar.

Technical and consumer information 9-11

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE Use the following steps to mount the license plate: Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag. ¼ License plate bracket ¼ J-nut x 2 ¼ Screw x 2 ¼ Screw grommet x 2 1. Temporarily place the license plate bracket while aligning points kA of the front bumper fascia with holes kB in the license plate bracket. 2. Remove the license plate bracket. 3. Carefully drill two shallow pilot holes kA using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations. (Be sure that the drill only goes through the fascia, or damage to the nut may occur.) 4. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia. 5. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the grommet hole to add 90° turn onto the part kC . 6. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket before placing the license plate bracket on the fascia. STI0446 7. Install the license plate bracket with screws. 9-12 Technical and consumer information

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION 8. Install the license plate with bolts that are no ids, emergency tools, and spare tire longer than 0.55 in (14 mm). WARNING assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo. ¼ It is extremely dangerous to ¼ ride in a cargo area inside a GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb vehicle. In a collision, people weight plus the combined weight of riding in these areas are more passengers and cargo. likely to be seriously injured or ¼ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- killed. ing) - maximum total combined weight ¼ Do not allow people to ride in of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, any area of your vehicle that is luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and not equipped with seats and any other optional equipment. This in- seat belts. formation is located on the ¼ Be sure everyone in your ve- F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. hicle is in a seat and using a ¼ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - seat belt properly. maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This informa- TERMS tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your ¼ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight vehicle: Rating) - maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo and ¼ Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: trailer. standard and optional equipment, flu- ¼ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Technical and consumer information 9-13

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Total load capacity - maximum total VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY weight limit specified of the load (pas- Do not exceed the load limit of your sengers and cargo) for the vehicle. vehicle shown as “The combined weight This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and of occupants and cargo that can be Loading Information label. Do not exceed loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is the number of occupants shown as used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load- weight must be included as part of the ing Information label. cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information To get “the combined weight of occu- label. pants and cargo”, add the weight of all ¼ occupants, then add the total luggage Cargo capacity - permissible weight of weight. Examples are shown in the fol- cargo, the subtracted weight of occu- lowing illustration. pants from the load limit.

9-14 Technical and consumer information

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs) or (640 − 340 (5 × 70) = 300 kg) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. STI0447 Steps for determining correct load your vehicle’s placard. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, limit load from your trailer will be trans- 2. Determine the combined weight of the ferred to your vehicle. Consult this 1. Locate the statement “The combined driver and passengers that will be manual to determine how this reduces weight of occupants and cargo should riding in your vehicle. the available cargo and luggage load never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on capacity of your vehicle. Technical and consumer information 9-15

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle not place cargo higher than the vehicle’s warranty. Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS could cause personal injury. vehicle. See “Measurement of Weights” Secure loose items to prevent weight ¼ Do not load your vehicle any later in this section. shifts that could affect the balance of heavier than the GVWR or the Also check tires for proper inflation pres- your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, maximum front and rear sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa- drive to a scale and weigh the front and GAWRs. If you do, parts of your tion label. the rear wheels separately to determine vehicle can break, tire damage axle loads. Individual axle loads should LOADING TIPS could occur, or it can change not exceed either of the gross axle weight the way your vehicle handles. ¼ The GVW must not exceed GVWR or ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle This could result in loss of con- GAWR as specified on the loads should not exceed the gross ve- trol and cause personal injury. F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la- hicle weight rating (GVWR). These rat- bel. ¼ Overloading not only could ings are given on the vehicle certification ¼ Do not load the front and rear axle to shorten the life of your vehicle label. If weight ratings are exceeded, the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the and the tire, but can also cause move or remove items to bring all weights GVWR. unsafe vehicle handling and below the ratings. long braking distances. This WARNING may cause a premature tire failure, which could result in a serious accident and personal in- ¼ Properly secure all cargo with jury. Failures caused by over ropes or straps to help prevent loading are not covered by the it from sliding or shifting. Do

9-16 Technical and consumer information

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ TOWING A TRAILER

Roadster model: Your engine, axle or other parts CAUTION Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. could be damaged. Coupe model: ¼ For the first 500 miles (800 km) that Vehicle damage resulting from im- Your new vehicle was designed to be used you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 proper towing procedures are not cov- primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Re- mph (80 km/h) and do not make ered by NISSAN warranties. member that towing a trailer places additional starts at full throttle. This helps the loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steer- engine and other parts of your ve- ing, braking and other systems. hicle wear in at the heavier loads. A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS guide includes information on trailer towing ca- pability and the special equipment required for Maximum trailer loads proper towing. Never allow the total trailer load to exceed 1,000 lb (454 kg). The total trailer load equals trailer WARNING weight plus its cargo weight. Towing loads greater than 1,000 lb (454 kg) or using improper Overloading or improper loading of a towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle trailer and its cargo can adversely affect handling, braking and performance. vehicle handling, braking and perfor- The ability of a vehicle to tow a trailer is not only mance and may lead to accidents. related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced CAUTION on very steep grades or in low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps). ¼ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles (800 km).

Technical and consumer information 9-17

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART Unit: lb (kg) MAXIMUM 1,000 (454) TOWING LOAD

MAXIMUM 100 (45.4) TONGUE LOAD TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Choose a proper hitch for a vehicle and trailer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to TI1011M TI1012M the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by cross- Tongue load Maximum gross vehicle weight/ winds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks. maximum gross axle weight Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11% of the Hitch ball total trailer load within the maximum tongue load The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle limits shown in the following Towing must not exceed. GVWR shown on the Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight Load/Specification chart. If the tongue load be- F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The rating for your trailer: comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for gross vehicle weight equals the combined ¼ proper tongue load. weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, The required hitch ball size is stamped on luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also optional equipment. In addition, front or rear have the size printed on top of the ball. gross axle weight must not exceed GAWR ¼ Choose the proper class hitch ball based on shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica- the trailer weight. tion label. ¼ The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should be 9-18 Technical and consumer information

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ no more than 1/16″ smaller than the hole in Safety chains the ball mount. trailer hitch. Always use a suitable chain between a vehicle ¼ ¼ The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be To reduce the possibility of addi- and the trailer. The safety chain should be long enough to be properly secured to the tional damage if a vehicle is struck crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads from the rear, where practical, re- to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave showing beyond the lock washer and nut. move the hitch and/or receiver when enough slack in the chain to permit turning Class I hitch not in use. corners. ¼ After the hitch is removed, seal the Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball Trailer lights bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers water or dust from entering the pas- of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg). senger compartment. CAUTION You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment to ¼ the vehicle that has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maxi- Regularly check that all trailer hitch When splicing into the vehicle electrical mum weight rating, but your vehicle is only mounting bolts are securely mounted. system, a commercially available capable of towing the maximum trailer weights power-type module/converter must be shown in the Towing Load/Specification Chart Tire pressures used to provide power for all trailer earlier in this section. lighting. This unit uses the vehicle bat- ¼ When towing a trailer, inflate the ve- tery as a direct power source for all CAUTION hicle tires to the recommended cold trailer lights while using the vehicle tail tire pressure indicated on the Tire and light, stoplight and turn signal circuits ¼ Do not use axle-mounted hitches. Loading Information label. as a signal source. The module/ converter must draw no more than 15 ¼ The hitch should not be attached to ¼ Trailer tire condition, size, load rating milliamps from the stop and tail lamp or affect the operation of the impact- and proper inflation pressure should circuits. Using a module/converter that absorbing bumper. be in accordance with the trailer and exceeds these power requirements may ¼ Do not modify the vehicle exhaust tire manufacturers’ specifications. damage the vehicle’s electrical system. system, brake system, etc. to install a See a reputable trailer dealer to obtain

Technical and consumer information 9-19

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ ¼ Always secure items in the trailer to prevent speed limits for vehicles that are towing the proper equipment and to have it load shifts while driving. trailers. Obey the local speed limits. installed. ¼ Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the ¼ When backing up, hold the bottom of the trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in steering wheel with one hand. Move your Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or the back half. hand in the direction in which you want the local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for trailer to go. Make small corrections and back ¼ Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup up slowly. If possible, have someone guide tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer into the vehicle electrical circuit at a point be- you when you are backing up. tween the sensor and stop light or light switch. wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle. ¼ Always block the wheels on both vehicle and Trailer brakes ¼ trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to recommended; however, if you must do so, If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, all federal, state and/or local regulations. If and if a vehicle is equipped with automatic make sure it conforms to federal and/or local not, install any mirrors required for towing transmission, first apply the parking brake regulations and that it is properly installed. before driving the vehicle. and block the wheels, and then move the Trailer towing tips transmission selector lever into the P (Park) WARNING position. If you move the selector lever to the In order to gain skill and an understanding of the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, and applying the parking brake, the transmis- Never connect a trailer brake system stopping and backing up in an area which is free sion may get damaged. directly to the vehicle brake system. from traffic. Steering stability, and braking per- ¼ formance will be somewhat different than under When going down a hill, shift into a lower normal driving conditions. gear and use the engine braking effect. Pre-towing tips When going up a long grade, downshift the ¼ Always secure items in the trailer to prevent transmission to a lower gear and reduce ¼ Be certain a vehicle maintains a level position load shift while driving. speed to reduce chances of engine overload- when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is ing and/or overheating. hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an ¼ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. unusual nose-up or nose-down condition; ¼ If the engine coolant rises to an extremely ¼ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. check for improper tongue load, overload, high temperature when the air conditioning worn suspension or other possible causes of ¼ Always drive a vehicle at a moderate speed. system is on, turn off the air conditioner. these conditions. Some states or provinces have specific Coolant heat can be additionally vented by 9-20 Technical and consumer information

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ FLAT TOWING

opening the windows, switching the fan con- Remember the length of the trailer must also Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the trol to high and setting the temperature con- pass the other vehicle before you can safely ground is sometimes called flat towing. This trol to the HOT position. change lanes. method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a ¼ ¼ To maintain engine braking efficiency and Trailer towing consumes more fuel than nor- motor home. mal circumstances. electrical charging performance, do not use 6th gear (manual transmission) or 5th posi- ¼ Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles tion (automatic transmission). CAUTION (800 km). ¼ Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long ¼ ¼ Have a vehicle serviced more often than at or too frequently. This could cause the brakes Failure to follow these guidelines intervals specified in the recommended main- to overheat, resulting in reduced braking ef- can result in severe transmission tenance schedule. ficiency. damage. ¼ When making a turn, your trailer wheels will ¼ Increase your following distance to allow for ¼ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, be closer to the inside of the turn than your greater stopping distances while towing a always tow forward, never backward. vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually. a larger than normal turning radius during the ¼ DO NOT tow any automatic transmis- ¼ turn. Do not use cruise control while towing a sion vehicle with all four wheels on trailer. ¼ Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely the ground (flat towing). Doing so ¼ affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus- Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con- WILL DAMAGE internal transmission ing vehicle sway. When being passed by nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 parts due to lack of transmission lu- larger vehicles, be prepared for possible miles (80 km) of travel and at every break. brication. changes in crosswinds that could affect ve- ¼ When stopped in traffic for long periods of ¼ For emergency towing procedures, hicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly time in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P refer to “Towing recommended by grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead, (Park) position. and immediately (but gradually) reduce ve- NISSAN” in the “6. In case of emer- hicle speed. This combination will help stabi- When towing a trailer, change transmis- gency” section of this manual. lize the vehicle. Never increase speed. sion oil more frequently. For additional information, see the “8. Maintenance and ¼ Be careful when passing other vehicles. do-it-yourself” section. Passing while towing a trailer requires con- siderably more distance than normal passing. Technical and consumer information 9-21

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to performance. To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic federal safety requirements in addition to these MUST transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly grades. be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive WARNING wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s Quality grades can be found where applicable recommendations when using their product. on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and The traction grade assigned to this tire MANUAL TRANSMISSION maximum section width. For example: is based on straight-ahead braking trac- Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A tion tests, and does not include accel- ¼ Always tow with the manual transmission in eration, cornering, hydroplaning, or Neutral. Treadwear peak traction characteristics. ¼ After towing 500 miles, start and idle the The treadwear grade is a comparative rating engine with the transmission in Neutral for based on the wear rate of the tire when tested Temperature A, B and C two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after under controlled conditions on a specified gov- every 500 miles of towing may cause damage ernment test course. For example, a tire graded The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, to internal transmission parts. 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the as well on the government course as a tire generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat graded 100. The relative performance of tires when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus- depends upon the actual conditions of their use, tained high temperature can cause the material however, and may depart significantly from the of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and norm due to variations in driving habits, service excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire practices and differences in road characteristics failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of and climate. performance which all passenger car tires must Traction AA, A, B and C meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are of performance on the laboratory test wheel than AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the the minimum required by law. tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea- sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con- 9-22 Technical and consumer information

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS WARRANTY (US only) Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following If you believe that your vehicle has a WARNING emission warranties. defect which could cause a crash or For US: could cause injury or death, you should The temperature grade for this tire is immediately inform the National High- ¼ Emission Defects Warranty established for a tire that is properly way Traffic Safety Administration inflated and not overloaded. Excessive ¼ Emissions Performance Warranty (NHTSA) in addition to notifying speed, under-inflation, or excessive (See Warranty Information Booklet for de- NISSAN. tails.) loading, either separately or in combi- If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it nation, can cause heat build-up and For Canada: may open an investigation, and if it possible tire failure. ¼ Emission Control System Warranty finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor- and remedy campaign. However, mation Booklet that comes with your NISSAN NHTSA cannot become involved in in- vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Infor- dividual problems between you, your mation Booklet, or it has become lost, you may dealer, or NISSAN. obtain a replacement by writing to: To contact NHTSA, you may call the ¼ Nissan North America, Inc. Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at Consumer Affairs Department 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- P.O. Box 685003 9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; Franklin, TN 37068-5003 or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 ¼ Nissan Canada Inc. Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 5290 Orbitor Drive 20590. You can also obtain other in- Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5 formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-

Technical and consumer information 9-23

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only) free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647- Due to legal requirements in some states/ 7261). areas, your vehicle may be required to be in what WARNING is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/ Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control Always drive the vehicle in a safe and system. prudent manner according to traffic The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when conditions and obey all traffic laws. it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. 1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle until If a powertrain system component is repaired or the engine coolant temperature gauge needle the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be points between the C and H (normal operat- reset to a not “ready condition”. Before taking ing temperature). the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/ 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), maintenance test readiness condition. Turn the then quickly release the accelerator pedal ignition switch ON without starting the engine. If completely and keep it released for at least the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on 10 seconds. steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test condition is “not ready”. If 3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of test condition is “ready”. 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 9 minutes. If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready” condition, drive the vehicle through the following 4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running. pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. 5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) If you cannot or do not want to perform the and maintain the speed for 20 seconds. driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times. 7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes. 8. Stop the vehicle. Place the automatic trans- 9-24 Technical and consumer information

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

mission gear selector lever in the P (Park) or This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data However, other parties, such as law enforce- N (Neutral) position or the manual transmis- Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is ment, could combine the EDR data with the type sion shift lever in the N position. to record, in certain crash or near crash-like of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. 9. Turn the engine off. situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in To read data recorded by an EDR, special 10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- equipment is required and access to the vehicle time. formed. The EDR is designed to record data or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, preceding step. Any safe driving mode is ac- for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or such as law enforcement, that have the special ceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to equipment, can read the information if they have until step 7 is completed. record such data as: access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will ¼ only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle How various systems in your vehicle were owner or lessee or as otherwise required or operating; permitted by law. ¼ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; ¼ How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, ¼ How fast the vehicle was traveling. ¼ Sounds are not recorded. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. Technical and consumer information 9-25

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best For Canada: Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect source of service and repair information for your your personal safety, preserve your warranty To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations protection and maintain the resale value of your Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, please con- and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using tact a NISSAN dealer. For the phone number procedures, this manual is the same one used by Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the factory trained technicians working at unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387- NISSAN dealerships. Also available are genuine the end of your lease. NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, and genuine 0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will NISSAN Service and Owner’s Manuals for older assist you. NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones NISSAN models. to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate Also available are Genuine NISSAN Service and the windshield of your vehicle in an accident. For USA: Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide For current pricing and availability of genuine IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION such built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model parts often show premature wear, rust and cor- year and later, contact: Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely rosion. event, there is some important information you 1-800-450-9491 should know. Many insurance companies rou- Why should you take a chance? www.nissan-techinfo.com tinely authorize the use of non-genuine collision In over 40 states, the law says you must be For current pricing and availability of genuine parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons. advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact: Insist on the use of Genuine NISSAN your vehicle. And some states have enacted Collision Parts! laws that restrict insurance companies from 1-800-247-5321 authorizing the use of non-genuine collision If you want your vehicle to be restored using For current pricing and availability of genuine parts during the new vehicle warranty. These parts made to NISSAN’s original exacting speci- laws help protect you, so you can take action to NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year fications — if you want to help it to last and hold protect yourself. and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact: its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your 1-800-247-5321 insurance agent and your repair shop to It’s your right! only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts. NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts, If you should need further information visit us at: nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or caused by a non-genuine part. www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers). 9-26 Technical and consumer information

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ 10 Index

Autochanger Bulb check/instrument panel...... 2-11 A Compact Disc (CD)...... 4-26 Bulb replacement ...... 8-26 Automatic ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)...... 5-22 Anti-glare inside mirror...... 3-27 Advanced air bag system...... 1-29 C Automatic adjusting function (front Air bag system windows)...... 2-40 Advanced air bag system...... 1-29 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 9-2 Automatic passenger seatback tilt Car phone or CB radio...... 4-31 Front passenger air bag and status light ..... 1-30 function...... 1-5, 3-17 Cargo (See vehicle loading information)...... 2-33 Air bag warning labels ...... 1-36 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ...... 8-12 Cargo net ...... 2-33 Air bag warning light ...... 1-37, 2-14 Driving with automatic transmission ..... 5-8, 5-11 Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst ...... 5-3 Air conditioner Avoiding collision and rollover...... 5-5 Air conditioner operation...... 4-9 CD care and cleaning...... 4-29 Air conditioner service ...... 4-9, 4-12 Child restraints...... 1-17 Air conditioner specification label ...... 9-11 B Booster seats ...... 1-19 Air conditioning system refrigerant and Precautions on child restraints...... 1-17 lubricant recommendations...... 4-12 Battery...... 8-15 Child safety...... 1-12 Heater and air conditioner (automatic)...... 4-9 Battery saver system ...... 2-25 Chimes, Audible reminders...... 2-17 Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle security Keyfob...... 8-24 Circuit breaker, Fusible link ...... 8-23 system)...... 2-19 Before starting the engine ...... 5-10 Cleaning exterior and interior ...... 7-2, 7-5 Alcohol, drugs and driving...... 5-7 Belts (See drive belts)...... 8-17 Clock ...... 2-30 Antenna...... 4-30 Booster seats...... 1-19 Clutch fluid...... 8-13 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)...... 5-22 Brake Cold weather driving ...... 5-26 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light... 2-11 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...... 5-22 Command (See Bluetooth Hands-Free Appearance care Brake and clutch fluid ...... 8-13 Phone System)...... 4-37 Exterior appearance care ...... 7-2 Brake fluid...... 8-13 Compact Disc (CD) changer (See audio Interior appearance care ...... 7-5 Brake system ...... 5-22 system)...... 4-26 Audible reminders ...... 2-17 Parking brake operation...... 5-16 Compact Disc (CD) player (See audio Audio operation precautions ...... 4-14 Warning light ...... 2-12 system)...... 4-21 Audio system...... 4-12 Break-in schedule ...... 5-19 Compact spare tire...... 8-40 Steering wheel audio controls ...... 4-29 Brightness control, Instrument panel ...... 2-26 Console box...... 2-35

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Control panel buttons (models with navigation E system) ...... 4-2 F Controls Economy, Fuel...... 5-19 Control panel buttons (display with F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label...... 9-10 navigation system) ...... 4-2 Elapsed time...... 2-10 Filter, Changing engine oil and filter ...... 8-10 Heater and air conditioner controls Emission control information label ...... 9-10 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch)... 2-27 (automatic) ...... 4-9 Emission control system warranty...... 9-23 Flat tire...... 6-2 Steering wheel audio controls ...... 4-29 Engine Flat towing ...... 9-21 Coolant Before starting the engine...... 5-10 Floor mat cleaning...... 7-5 Capacities and recommended fuel/ Break-in schedule...... 5-19 Fluid lubricants...... 9-2 Capacities and recommended fuel/ Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ...... 8-12 Changing engine coolant...... 8-9 lubricants...... 9-2 Brake and clutch fluid ...... 8-13 Checking engine coolant level...... 8-8 Changing engine coolant...... 8-9 Brake fluid...... 8-13 Corrosion protection...... 7-6 Changing engine oil and filter ...... 8-10 Capacities and recommended fuel/ Cruise control...... 5-17 Checking engine coolant level...... 8-8 lubricants...... 9-2 Cup holders...... 2-33 Checking engine oil level...... 8-9 Engine coolant ...... 8-8 Coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-5 Engine oil...... 8-9 Engine block heater ...... 5-27 D Power steering fluid...... 8-12 Engine compartment check locations...... 8-7 Window washer fluid...... 8-14 Engine cooling system...... 8-8 Daytime running light system ...... 2-25 FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) Engine oil...... 8-9 player...... 4-19 Defroster switch, Rear window and outside Engine oil and oil filter recommendation...... 9-5 mirror defroster switch...... 2-23 FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) Engine oil viscosity ...... 9-5 changer...... 4-23 Dimensions and weights...... 9-8 Engine serial number...... 9-10 Front passenger air bag and status light...... 1-30 Display controls (See control panel buttons), With navigation system ...... 4-2 Engine specifications ...... 9-7 Front power seat adjustment...... 1-4 Door open warning light...... 2-12 If your vehicle overheats...... 6-9 Fuel Drive belts ...... 8-17 Oil pressure gauge...... 2-7 Average fuel consumption ...... 2-9 Driving Starting the engine...... 5-10 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants...... 9-2 Cold weather driving ...... 5-26 Event data recorders...... 9-25 Distance to empty...... 2-9 Driving with automatic transmission ..... 5-8, 5-11 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)...... 5-2 Fuel economy ...... 5-19 Driving with manual transmission...... 5-8, 5-14 Fuel octane rating ...... 9-3 Precautions when starting and driving ...... 5-2 Fuel recommendation...... 9-3 Fuel-filler cap ...... 3-23 Fuel-filler door...... 3-23 10-2

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Gauge ...... 2-6 Heater and air conditioner (automatic)...... 4-9 Keys...... 3-2 Fuses...... 8-21 HomeLink Universal Transceiver...... 2-43 Fusible links ...... 8-23 Hood release ...... 3-9 L Horn...... 2-27 G Labels I Air bag warning labels ...... 1-36 Garage door opener, HomeLink Universal Air conditioner specification label ...... 9-11 Transceiver...... 2-43 Ignition switch...... 5-7 Emission control information label ...... 9-10 Gas cap...... 3-23 Automatic transmission models...... 5-8, 5-11 Engine serial number...... 9-10 Gauge...... 2-3 Key positions...... 5-9 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 9-10 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-5 Manual transmission models ...... 5-8, 5-14 Tire and Loading Information label..... 8-32, 9-11 Engine oil pressure gauge...... 2-7 Immobilizer system...... 2-19 Vehicle identification number (VIN) ...... 9-9 License plate, Installing front license plate...... 9-12 Fuel gauge ...... 2-6 Indicator lights...... 2-15 Light Odometer ...... 2-4 Inside Air bag warning light ...... 1-37 Speedometer...... 2-4 Automatic anti-glare mirror...... 3-27 Bulb replacement ...... 8-26 Tachometer...... 2-5 Mirror...... 3-26 Headlight switch ...... 2-24 Trip computer...... 2-8 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ...... 9-24 Headlights bulb replacement...... 8-27 Volt meter...... 2-8 Instrument brightness control ...... 2-26 Indicator lights...... 2-15 General maintenance...... 8-2 Instrument panel...... 2-2 Interior lights ...... 2-41 Golf bag stowing...... 2-37 Instrument pocket...... 2-32 Interior light replacement...... 8-28 Luggage compartment light...... 2-42 Interior lights...... 2-41 Map lights...... 2-41 H Interior trunk lid release ...... 3-12 Replacement...... 8-26 Room light ...... 2-41 Hatch, Rear hatch...... 3-9 Trunk light...... 2-42 Hazard warning flasher switch...... 2-27 J Vanity mirror light...... 2-42 Head restraints...... 1-8 Warning/indicator lights and audible Headlights Jump starting...... 6-7 reminders ...... 2-11 Bulb replacement ...... 8-27 Xenon headlights...... 2-24 Headlight switch ...... 2-24 K Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement ... 8-28 Xenon headlights...... 2-24 Loading information (See vehicle loading Heated seats ...... 2-28 Keyfob battery replacement...... 8-24 information) ...... 9-13 Heater Keyless entry (See remote keyless entry Lock Engine block heater ...... 5-27 system) ...... 3-5 Door locks...... 3-3 10-3

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Power door lock ...... 3-3 Power N Rear floor box ...... 2-35 Front seat adjustment ...... 1-4 Rear hatch lock...... 3-9 Power door lock ...... 3-3 Net, Cargo net ...... 2-33 Top latch lever...... 3-16 Power outlet...... 2-31 New vehicle break-in...... 5-19 Trunk lid...... 3-11 Power steering fluid...... 8-12 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System...... 2-19 Low tire pressure warning light...... 2-13 Power steering system...... 5-21 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System, Engine Low tire pressure warning system (See tire Power windows...... 2-39 start...... 5-9 pressure monitoring system (TPMS))...... 5-3 Precautions Luggage compartment light...... 2-42 Audio operation...... 4-14 O Braking precautions ...... 5-22 M Child restraints ...... 1-17 Odometer...... 2-4 Cruise control...... 5-17 Maintenance Oil Maintenance ...... 8-5 Battery ...... 8-15 Capacities and recommended fuel/ Seat belt usage ...... 1-9 General maintenance ...... 8-2 lubricants...... 9-2 Supplemental restraint system...... 1-22 Inside the vehicle...... 8-3 Changing engine oil and filter ...... 8-10 When starting and driving ...... 5-2 Maintenance information (display) ...... 4-3 Checking engine oil level...... 8-9 Push starting...... 6-9 Maintenance precautions ...... 8-5 Engine oil...... 8-9 Maintenance requirements...... 8-2 Engine oil pressure gauge...... 2-7 R Outside the vehicle...... 8-2 Engine oil viscosity ...... 9-5 Opening the soft top...... 3-13 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-16 Radio ...... 4-12 Outside air temperature display...... 2-9 Under the hood and vehicle...... 8-4 Car phone or CB radio...... 4-31 Outside mirrors...... 3-28 Malfunction indicator light (MIL)...... 2-15 FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) Overheat, If your vehicle overheats...... 6-9 Map lights...... 2-41 changer ...... 4-23 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order Meter, Trip computer ...... 2-8 FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) information...... 9-26 Meters and gauges ...... 2-3 player ...... 4-19 Meters and gauges, Instrument brightness Steering wheel audio controls ...... 4-29 control ...... 2-26 P Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) Mirror test (US only) ...... 9-24 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ...... 3-27 Parking Rear floor box...... 2-35 Inside mirror ...... 3-26 Brake break-in ...... 5-22 Rear hatch ...... 3-9 Outside mirrors ...... 3-28 Parking brake operation...... 5-16 Rear hatch opener...... 3-9 Parking on hills...... 5-20 Rear parcel box ...... 2-37 Phone, Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-31 Rear power point...... 2-31 10-4

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Rear window and outside mirror defroster Seats ...... 1-2 Stopwatch...... 2-10 switch ...... 2-23 Seatback tilt cancel switch ...... 1-7 Storage ...... 2-32 Rear window wiper and washer switch ...... 2-22 Secondary rear hatch release...... 3-10 Stowing golf bags...... 2-37 Recorders, Event data ...... 9-25 Secondary trunk lid release...... 3-13 Sun visors ...... 3-26 Registering your vehicle in another country...... 9-9 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sunglasses holder ...... 2-32 Remote keyless entry system ...... 3-5 System), Engine start...... 2-19 Supplemental air bag warning labels...... 1-36 Reporting safety defects (US only) ...... 9-23 Security system, Vehicle security system ...... 2-18 Supplemental air bag warning light...... 1-37, 2-14 Rollover...... 5-5 Selector lever, Shift lock release ...... 5-14 Supplemental restraint system...... 1-22 Roof, Soft top...... 3-13 Servicing air conditioner...... 4-9, 4-12 Precautions on supplemental restraint Room light...... 2-41 Shift lock release, Transmission...... 5-14 system...... 1-22 Shifting Switch S Automatic transmission...... 5-8, 5-11 Audio control steering wheel switch ...... 4-29 Manual transmission ...... 5-8, 5-14 Hazard warning flasher switch...... 2-27 Safety Shoulder belt arm...... 1-16 Headlight switch ...... 2-24 Child seat belts...... 1-12 Soft top, Care and cleaning ...... 7-3 Ignition switch ...... 5-7 Reporting safety defects (US only)...... 9-23 Soft top, If the top does not open or close...... 3-19 Ignition switch automatic transmission Towing safety...... 9-18 Soft top, Soft top indicator light...... 2-17, 3-17 models...... 5-8, 5-11 Seat adjustment, Front power seat adjustment... 1-4 Soft top, Soft top operation ...... 3-13 Ignition switch manual transmission Seat belt(s) Spare tire ...... 9-8 models...... 5-8, 5-14 Child safety ...... 1-12 Spark plugs...... 8-17 Power door lock switch...... 3-4 Injured persons...... 1-13 Speed, Speed indicator...... 2-9 Rear window and outside mirror defroster Larger children ...... 1-13 Speedometer ...... 2-4 switch...... 2-23 Precautions on seat belt usage...... 1-9 Starting Traction control system (TCS) off switch .... 2-29 Pregnant women...... 1-13 Before starting the engine...... 5-10 Turn signal switch ...... 2-26 Seat belt cleaning...... 7-6 Jump starting...... 6-7 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch... 2-29 Seat belt extenders...... 1-16 Precautions when starting and driving ...... 5-2 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-16 Push starting ...... 6-9 T Seat belt warning light ...... 2-14 Starting the engine...... 5-10 Seat belts...... 1-9 Status light, Front passenger air bag ...... 1-30 Tachometer...... 2-5 Shoulder belt arm...... 1-16 Steering Temperature display...... 2-9 Three-point type with retractor ...... 1-13 Power steering fluid...... 8-12 Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature Seat lever, Tilting passenger’s seat...... 1-6 Power steering system...... 5-21 gauge...... 2-5 Seat(s) Steering wheel switch for audio controls..... 4-29 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), Heated seats...... 2-28 Tilting steering wheel...... 3-25 Engine start...... 2-19 10-5

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Three-way catalyst...... 5-3 Transmission Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch... 2-29 Tilting passenger’s seat ...... 1-6 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ...... 8-12 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system ...... 5-24 Tilting steering wheel ...... 3-25 Driving with automatic transmission ..... 5-8, 5-11 Ventilators ...... 4-8 Tire pressure, Low tire pressure warning Driving with manual transmission...... 5-8, 5-14 Voice command (See Bluetooth Hands-Free light ...... 2-13 Transmission selector lever lock release...... 5-14 Phone System)...... 4-37 Tires Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system)... 3-5 Volt meter ...... 2-8 Flat tire...... 6-2 Traveling or registering your vehicle in another Low tire pressure warning system...... 5-3 country...... 9-9 W Spare tire...... 8-40 Trip computer ...... 2-8 Tire and Loading Information label..... 8-32, 9-11 Trip odometer...... 2-10 Warning labels, Air bag warning labels ...... 1-36 Tire chains ...... 8-37 Trunk Warning light Tire dressing...... 7-4 Interior trunk lid release ...... 3-12 Air bag warning light...... 1-37, 2-14 Tire pressure...... 8-30 Light ...... 2-42 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning Tire pressure monitoring system Secondary trunk lid release ...... 3-13 light...... 2-11 (TPMS)...... 5-3, 6-2 Trunk lid...... 3-11 Brake warning light ...... 2-12 Tire rotation ...... 8-37 Turn signal switch ...... 2-26 Door open warning light ...... 2-12 Types of tires...... 8-36 Low tire pressure warning light ...... 2-13 Uniform tire quality grading...... 9-22 Seat belt warning light ...... 2-14 U Wheel/tire size...... 9-8 Warning lights...... 2-11 Wheels and tires ...... 8-30 Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 2-27 Underbody cleaning ...... 7-3 Top, Soft top ...... 3-13 Warning, Tire pressure monitoring system Uniform tire quality grading ...... 9-22 Towing (TPMS) ...... 5-3, 6-2 Up-shift indicator (M/T models) ...... 5-15 Flat towing...... 9-21 Warning, Warning/indicator lights and audible Up-shift indicator setting (rpm) (M/T models)... 2-10 Tow truck towing...... 6-10 reminders...... 2-11 Towing a trailer...... 9-17 Warranty, Emission control system warranty..... 9-23 Towing load/specification chart...... 9-17 V Washer switch Towing safety...... 9-18 Rear window wiper and washer switch...... 2-22 TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system...... 5-3 Vanity mirror light ...... 2-42 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...... 2-21 TPMS, Tire pressure warning system...... 6-2 Vehicle Washing...... 7-2 Traction control system (TCS)...... 5-24 Dimensions and weights ...... 9-8 Waxing...... 7-3 Traction control system (TCS) off switch...... 2-29 Identification number (VIN) ...... 9-9 Weights (See dimensions and weights) ...... 9-8 Trailer towing...... 9-17 Loading information...... 9-13 Wheel/tire size...... 9-8 Transceiver, HomeLink Universal Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)...... 6-12 Wheels and tires ...... 8-30 Transceiver...... 2-43 Security system...... 2-18 Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels ...... 7-4 10-6

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ Window washer fluid ...... 8-14 Window(s) Automatic adjusting function ...... 2-40 Cleaning...... 7-3 Power windows...... 2-39 Windshield wiper and washer switch...... 2-21 Wiper Rear window wiper and washer switch...... 2-22 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...... 2-21 Wiper blades ...... 8-19

Xenon headlights...... 2-24

10-7

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ MEMO

10-8

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭ GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION: NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN leaded gasoline be used, because Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane PROCEDURES this will damage the three-way cata- RECOMMENDATION: rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) lyst. number (Research octane number 96). During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of ve- ¼ Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded hicle use, follow the recommendations outlined Your vehicle is not designed to run in the “Break-in schedule” information found in regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can number (Research octane number 91) may be the “5. Starting and driving” section of this damage the fuel system components Owner’s Manual. Follow these recommenda- temporarily used, but only under the following and is not covered by the NISSAN tions for the future reliability and economy of precautions: vehicle limited warranty. your new vehicle. ¼ Have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with unleaded premium gasoline as soon as pos- For additional information, see “Capacities and sible. recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Techni- cal and consumer information” section. ¼ Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION: However, for maximum vehicle perfor- ¼ Engine oil with API Certification Mark mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso- ¼ Viscosity SAE 5W-30 line is recommended. See “Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer CAUTION information” section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation. ¼ Using a fuel other than that specified COLD TIRE INFLATION could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect PRESSURES: the warranty coverage. The label is typically located on the driver side ¼ center pillar or on the driver’s door. For addi- Under no circumstances should a tional information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

੬ 08.7.17/Z33-X/V5.0 ੭